JP2024053109A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable game presentation. [Solution] When a gaming ball enters an upper actuation port or a lower actuation port, reserved information is acquired. A reserved pre-reading process is executed for the acquired reserved information, and a reserved advance notice presentation is executed in which the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result. There are a plurality of game states, a normal game state, a high probability game state, and a time-saving game state, and when a win/lose lottery results in a jackpot and an opening/closing execution mode is executed, a transition is made to one of the plurality of game states. With regard to the reserved image that was set to a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, a means is provided for changing the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode to a mode different from the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode when the game state is different before and after the opening/closing execution mode is executed. [Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined bonus is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

However, there is still room for improvement in terms of game presentation in gaming machines such as those exemplified above.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can perform game presentations in an optimal manner.

The present invention relates to
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an assignment determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a result of the awarding determination by the awarding determination means being a bonus corresponding result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the awarding information;
a destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A first specific notification means for causing a specific notification to be executed by a predetermined notification means based on a result of the first specific processing;
Equipped with
The first specific notification means includes a first notification mode setting means for setting a notification mode of the specific notification to any one of a plurality of notification modes, and is configured to execute the specific notification based on a setting result of the first notification mode setting means,
a second specific notification means for, when a predetermined abnormality occurs during execution of the specific notification, re-executing the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved;
The second specific notification means is characterized in that it is equipped with a second notification mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after the specified abnormality is resolved based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the specified abnormality occurred, the result of the specific notification processing executed before the specified abnormality occurred, or the result of the specific notification processing executed after the specified abnormality is resolved.

The present invention makes it possible to provide optimal game presentations.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to one embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in a closed state, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in an open state. 1A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device when it is in a closed state, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device when it is in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 11 is a diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a win/lose table. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a second special symbol. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a jackpot, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a miss. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process in the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a reserved read-ahead process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. A diagram showing the configuration of a hold memory area. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notice performance, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold change points during a game round. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for hold notice. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a presentation mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. A figure showing an example of a production scenario lottery table. 1A is a flowchart showing the first execution process of the hold notice, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the configuration of the display mode memory area. A diagram to explain the change suggestion presentation. 13A is a flowchart showing a shift command response process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining a shift process of a reserved image. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. 13 is a flowchart showing the second execution process of the hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing the third execution process of the hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for promoting a pending notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a promotion determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process according to the second embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13 is a flowchart showing a rendering mode switching process according to a third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a return determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for hold notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for an opening/closing execution mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a return determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13A is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process according to a fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a pending command setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. 11 is a flowchart showing a first reserved read-ahead process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for an opening/closing execution mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a second reserved read-ahead process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an upper limit display mode table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for restoring a hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 13 is a flowchart showing the fourth execution process of the hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for promoting a pending notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13A is a flowchart showing main processing according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing normal processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 23 is a flowchart showing a presentation mode switching process according to the eighth embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a mode switching determination process. A figure showing how switching of presentation modes is restricted. A figure showing the switching manner of presentation modes in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for hold notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made of plate material connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main body 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front (see Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose external shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20, allowing almost the entire play area PE, which will be described later, to be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and the two glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

As shown in FIG. 1, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a lamp section (annular illumination section) 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The lamp section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up in the event of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the lamp section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

The upper surface of the upper bulge 31 is provided with a performance operation unit 36 (more specifically, a push button) that is manually operated by the player. For example, the performance operation unit 36 is manually operated according to suggestions displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, which will be described later, and the performance content on the display screen G, etc. becomes a predetermined performance content that corresponds to the operation.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude forward. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to define an entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. Game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the rear side of the pivot base end. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the pivot tip end side. These hooks 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50, which has an approximately rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is also positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A fascia is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia is positioned below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end portion), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on the fascia.

Support brackets 51, 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the resin base 50 on the rotation base side. Axle holes are formed in the support brackets 51, 52, and the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axle holes, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50 has an insertion hole at the tip of the rotation for inserting the hook metal fittings 49 provided on the back of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. 3, in this pachinko machine 10, the locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden and arranged on the back side of the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook metal fittings 49 are engaged with the locking device 55 (more specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 is locked so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. The locking device 55 also has multiple inner frame hook members 57 extending rearward from the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 57 are hooked onto the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main body 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and the locking device 55 is configured so that when a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A roughly elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is blocked from the rear by the game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 is made of wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers the front board surface of the plywood, and its front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE where game balls flow down is formed in this exposed area, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 has multiple openings of various sizes that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, etc.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating opening 62, and the second operating opening 63, it is detected by a winning sensor (detection sensor), and a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. Also, when a ball enters the first operating opening 62, 3 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating opening 63, 1 game ball is paid out. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 64, no game balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls associated with the first operating port 62 may be the same as the number of prize balls associated with the second operating port 63, or the number of prize balls associated with the second operating port 63 may be greater than the number of prize balls associated with the first operating port 62. The number of prize balls associated with the variable winning device 65 may be the same as or less than the number of prize balls associated with other operating ports. A predetermined number of game balls may also be paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

At the bottom of the game board 60, an outlet 68 is provided, and game balls that do not enter the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening position, and includes not only a situation in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position, but also a situation in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 68, balls entering the general winning port 61, the operating ports 62, 63, the variable winning device 65, or the through gate 64 will also be referred to as winning.

The game board 60 is also provided with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged on it. These nails 69, windmills, and other components diversify the flow of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the general winning hole 61 and the like described above occurs with a reasonable probability.

The variable display unit 67 is located in the center of the game board 60. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back side of the game board 60 (Figure 3), and its display screen G can be viewed through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front of the game board 60, corresponding to the periphery of the opening.

The center frame 76 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the gap dimension between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from entering the inner area of the center frame 76 and coming into contact with the display screen G. In addition, the center frame 76 distributes the flow path of the game ball as it flows down the game area PE to the left and right, forming a left route that passes through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route that passes through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes through) the left or right route is determined by the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, i.e., the launch force of the game ball. The launched game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, so the stronger the launch force of the game ball, the more likely it is that the game ball will flow down the right route.

In more detail, when the player rotates the game ball launching handle 41 as the first launching operation with a rotation amount in the first range that is equal to or greater than the predetermined rotation amount but less than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball flows down the left route, and when the player rotates the game ball launching handle 41 as the second launching operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball flows down the right route. Note that the predetermined rotation amount is the rotation amount that allows the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 described below and enter the game area PE, and the reference rotation amount is the rotation amount that launches the game ball with a launch force that can reach the top of the center frame 76.

A first operating port 62 that opens upward is disposed below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The first operating port 62 is located in the center of the game board 60, but game components such as nails 69 are disposed to prevent game balls flowing down the right route from entering the first operating port 62. In other words, only game balls flowing down the left route can enter the first operating port 62. Therefore, when a player aims to enter the first operating port 62, the player plays by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left route. A first operating port entry sensor 62a (FIG. 7) is provided in the first operating port 62, and the entry sensor 62a detects game balls that have entered the first operating port 62.

The second actuation port 63 is located to the right of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second actuation port 63 will be described with reference to Figure 5.

The second operating port 63 is provided with a normal power attachment 63a (variable receiving means) that serves as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces that are supported so as to be rotatable in the left and right direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening serving as the second operating port 63 from both the left and right sides.

The rotation of each of the movable pieces allows the opening 63 to be switched between a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) shown in FIG. 5(a) and an open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5(b). In detail, a protrusion 63d is provided at the top of the second operating port 63 so as to protrude forward, and when the movable pieces are in an upright position as shown in FIG. 5(a), the gap between each of the movable pieces and the protrusion 63d becomes less than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second operating port 63. On the other hand, when the movable pieces are rotated so as to tilt outward as shown in FIG. 5(b), an opening large enough for the game ball to pass through is formed between the protrusion 63d and the movable pieces, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the second operating port 63. A winning sensor 63c for the second operating port is provided at the second operating port 63, and the winning sensor 63c detects a game ball that has won the second operating port 63.

The normal power supply mechanism 63a is provided with a drive unit 63b that drives each movable piece. Each movable piece is driven by the drive unit 63b through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between an open state (inclined position) and a closed state (standing position). Incidentally, the first operating port 62 is not provided with a normal power supply mechanism (opening/closing structure).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to enter the second operating port 63 when it is closed, but it may be possible to enter. In other words, it may be possible to enter the second operating port 63 when it is closed, but it is more difficult to enter (it is more difficult to enter) than when it is open. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the second operating port 63 differs between the open and closed states, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. In addition, the configuration of the normal power device 63a is not limited to the above, and for example, the second operating port 63 may be opened and closed by a movable piece rotating back and forth or sliding back and forth or left and right.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is disposed above (upstream of) the second operating port 63 on the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and a game ball that enters the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, a game ball that enters the through gate 64 can also enter the second operating port 63. A through entry sensor 64a (FIG. 7) is provided on the through gate 64, and the entry sensor 64a detects a game ball that enters the through gate 64.

The through gate 64 is a trigger for opening the normal power device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a prize is won through the through gate 64, and if the result of the internal lottery is an opening result (support win), a device opening/closing game (support execution mode) is executed in which the normal power device 63a is opened from a closed state and then returned to the closed state.

In the right route, a variable winning device 65 is located below (downstream of) the second operating port 63. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 6.

The variable winning device 65 is equipped with a large winning opening 65a that opens to the front, and an opening/closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The large winning opening 65a is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow multiple game balls to win at the same time. The large winning opening 65a is connected to a guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and is configured so that all game balls that win in the large winning opening 65a are guided to the guide passage 65e. A winning sensor 65c for the large winning opening is provided in the guide passage 65e, and the winning sensor 65c detects game balls that win in the large winning opening 65a.

The variable winning device 65 is also provided with a drive unit 65d that drives the opening and closing door 65b. The opening and closing door 65b is driven by the drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between a closed state (FIG. 6(a)) in which game balls cannot enter the large winning opening 65a, and an open state (FIG. 6(b)) in which game balls can enter the large winning opening 65a. Specifically, the opening and closing door 65b is normally in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when an internal lottery is won to transition to an opening and closing execution mode (large win game).

The open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode is switched when a jackpot is won. The open/close execution mode will be described in detail later. In the case of a jackpot, the variable winning device 65 may be opened repeatedly for up to a maximum of multiple rounds (e.g., 10 rounds), with one round being the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10 prizes).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize through the large prize opening 65a when it is closed, but it may be possible to win a prize. In other words, it may be possible to win a prize through the large prize opening 65a when it is closed, but it may be more difficult to win a prize (make it more difficult to win a prize) than when it is open. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of winning a prize through the large prize opening 65a differs between the open and closed states, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, only game balls that flow down the right route can win the second operating port 63, through gate 64, and variable winning device 65. Therefore, when a player aims to win the second operating port 63, through gate 64, and variable winning device 65, the player will play by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the play area PE, and protrudes forward from the front of the play board 60. A special display section 43 and a regular display section 44, which display predetermined pictures, etc., are provided on the front of the main display unit 81. These display sections 43, 44 are visible from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. The gap dimension between the front of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from passing in front of the main display unit 81, ensuring the visibility of the various display sections 43, 44.

The special chart display section 43 is provided with a first special chart display section AS that displays the results of a lottery based on winning the first operating port 62, and a second special chart display section BS that displays the results of a lottery based on winning the second operating port 63.

In the first special chart display unit AS, the winning of the first operating port 62 is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the first operating port 62. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping in the first special chart display unit AS, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode is entered.

In the second special chart display section BS, the winning of the second operating port 63 is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the second operating port 63. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping in the second special chart display section BS is stopped, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode is entered.

In the following, to distinguish between the image that changes in appearance when a winning jackpot is won through the first operating port 62 and the image that changes in appearance when a winning jackpot is won through the second operating port 63, the former will be referred to as the first special image or first special design, and the latter as the second special image or second special design.

Here, based on a win in any of the operating ports 62, 63, a change display is started in the corresponding special chart display unit AS, BS, and the period from when the specified stop result is displayed until the change display is stopped corresponds to one play round in the special chart display unit AS, BS. However, one play round is not limited to the above, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the change display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a win occurs in any of the operating ports 62, 63, the change display is started in that single display area, and one play round corresponds to the period from when the change display is started in that single display area until the specified stop result is displayed and the change display is stopped.

The main display unit 81 is also provided with a special symbol reserved number display section AM. The number of times that the game ball has entered the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved up to four times, and the special symbol reserved number display section AM can display the reserved number of the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) and the reserved number of the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) separately.

The normal map display unit 44 is a display unit for displaying the results of an internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 64. In this case, the normal map display unit 44 displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at the through gate 64, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 64 is displayed clearly. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 64 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a support state in which the normal power device 63a is opened, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the normal map display unit 44, the changing display is stopped, and then a transition to the support state occurs. Note that the pattern that is displayed in a changing manner triggered by winning at the through gate 64 is sometimes called a normal pattern or a normal map.

Here, based on winning at the through gate 64, the variable display starts in the normal map display section 44, and the period from when a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display stops corresponds to one play round in the normal map display section 44. In the following, to distinguish between a play round in the normal map display section 44 and a play round in the special map display sections AS and BS, the former may be referred to as a normal map play round, and the latter as a special map play round.

The regular map display section 44 is also provided with a regular map reserve number display section FM. The number of times that a game ball has entered the through gate 64 can be reserved up to four times, and the regular map reserve number display section FM can display the number of reserved regular maps (through gate 64).

The special map display unit 43 and the general map display unit 44 are configured with a segment display device having multiple segments, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display section for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode. The round display section starts displaying the number of rounds when the opening and closing execution mode is started or has been started. This display continues without changing the display content while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, and ends when the opening and closing execution mode is ended or has been ended.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a pattern display device 75 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches between) a pattern, which is a type of picture.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 75 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 75, for example, patterns are displayed in a line at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are scrolled left and right to change and display. In this case, the changing display on the pattern display device 75 is started based on a winning entry in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. In other words, when a changing display is performed on the special pattern display section 43, a changing display is also performed on the pattern display device 75 accordingly. Then, when the variable winning device 65 transitions to a jackpot game state (open/close execution mode) in which it is in an open state, a predetermined pattern combination is displayed stopped on a preset winning line on the pattern display device 75.

The pattern display device 75 also displays a reservation corresponding to the first special display unit AS and the second special display unit BS. In this reservation display, a predetermined reservation image is displayed, and the number of reserved items in each operating port 63, 64 is indicated by the number of reserved items displayed. The reservation number is not limited to that indicated by the reservation image, but may be indicated by a numerical display. In addition, the reservation number may be indicated by, for example, a display unit (a display unit separate from the reservation number display units AM, FM of the main display unit 81) or a light-emitting unit (reservation lamp unit) provided on the game board 60, separate from the pattern display device 75.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 again. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 on the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are attached. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, and thus the game ball launching mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board 60. A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is provided at a position closer to the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source and a launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of electrical signals from the power source and the launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board 60, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board 60.

As shown in FIG. 4, the guide rail 100 defines the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged facing each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the play ball, and a guide passage 103 is defined by these two rails 101, 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion that opens to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion located at the top of the play area PE. The play ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion).

In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the bottom edge of the game board 60. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the bottom edge of the game board 60. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the bottom edge of the game board 60, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns inside the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage 46 is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched, and returns the game ball that has become a foul ball to the player.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50, and has a main body side upper dish passage and a main body side lower dish passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side upper dish passage, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and a biasing member is provided to bias the opening/closing member to a forward position where the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side are closed. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front door frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage on the main body side is connected to the upper tray passage on the front door side, and the lower tray passage on the main body side is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to Figure 3.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides of the rotation base end on the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing fittings 132 are formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

The back surface of the resin base 50 is provided with multiple locking fittings, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking fittings. Here, we will explain the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67, which is located in the center of the game board 60, so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A performance control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the performance control device 143 is attached to the mounting base 144.

The performance control device 143 is equipped with a performance control board that controls the sound, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collection plate 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60 below the variable display unit 67. The collection plate 150 is provided with a game ball recovery mechanism that recovers game balls that have entered the various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, etc.

Regarding the game ball recovery mechanism, the collecting board 150 is provided with recovery passages corresponding to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These recovery passages run down from the ball entry sections along the back of the game board 60, and define the path along which the game balls fall. The recovery passages join near the bottom end of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through the ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61 are collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery passages. The outlet of each recovery passage is open downward, and a discharge passage is provided at the end of the outlet (more specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls that have collected below the game board 60 through the recovery passage are led out to the discharge passage. The outlet 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are also led out to the discharge passage via the outlet 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with winning sensors (detection sensors) that individually correspond to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These winning sensors are arranged at intermediate positions in each recovery passage leading to the ball entry section such as the general winning opening 61, and detect the passage of the game ball when the falling path of the game ball is specified in the recovery passage. In other words, the entry of the game ball into a ball entry port such as the general winning opening 61 is detected when the game ball passes through a detection area provided at an intermediate position in each recovery passage. The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects the change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the rear side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these winning sensors are output to the main control device. The main control device unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that is responsible for the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a sealing part that serves as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected to each other in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part. The sealing process using the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the multiple sealing parts. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing parts is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a record indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163.

One short side of the board box 163 has multiple connecting pieces that protrude out to the side. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one to the multiple connectable pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the connecting pieces and the connectable pieces seal between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism 202, a discharge passage panel 203, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, has a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover part 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base 211 has an external output terminal 213 at its upper right side. The external output terminal 213 has various output terminals, and various signals are output to the hall computer HC (management control device) at the gaming hall through these output terminals. In addition, the base 211 has a pair of upper and lower hook pins at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the hook pins into the bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing part) provided on the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole provided on the inner frame 13 is provided at the pivot tip of the base 211, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by fitting the fastener into the fastening hole.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the bottom of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to a game ball distribution section provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that the inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage and front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and front door side lower tray passage.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage panel 203 and the control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 181 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board that controls the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a status return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when the status return switch is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, which generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of the game ball in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring section (power outage monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power supply and detects the occurrence of a power outage or other power interruption. This pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and retaining various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns to normal, the state before the power outage is restored. For example, when the power supply is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. The power supply and launch control device 191 is also provided with a RAM erase switch. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 311 of the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 312. The MPU 312 contains a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 312, a RAM 314 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 313, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like.

RAM 314 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data using backup voltage from the power supply and firing control device 191 even after a power outage occurs, and RAM 314 is provided with a backup area in addition to an area for temporarily storing various data, etc. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer, values of each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power interruption when a power outage occurs. When recovering from the power outage (when power is restored), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and the RAM 314 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 312, but this is not limiting and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. In addition, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include a general winning port winning sensor 61a, a first operating port winning sensor 62a, a second operating port winning sensor 63c, a through winning sensor 64a, and a large winning port winning sensor 65c, which detect winnings in the general winning port 61, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65. The MPU 312 performs winning judgments (ball winning judgments) for each winning section based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, and 65c. In addition, the MPU 312 executes various lotteries based on the winnings at the first actuation port 62, the second actuation port 63, and the through gate 64.

The output side of the MPU 312 is connected to the payout control device 181, the performance control device 143, etc. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on the winning determination result for the prize ball entry section corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands, such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output to the performance control device 143. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 312 is connected to various drive units, such as the drive unit 63b for the normal power device 63a and the drive unit 65d for the variable winning device 65. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 311, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the drive unit 65d so that the opening/closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65 is driven. Also, when a transition to the support state occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the drive unit 63b so that each movable piece of the normal power device 63a is driven. Also, during each special pattern play, display control of the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS in the special pattern display unit 43 is executed. Also, during a normal pattern play, display control of the normal pattern display unit 44 is executed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and information on balls entering various entry areas and lottery results such as big wins are output to the hall computer HC through this external output terminal 213. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement park. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 311, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring unit 315, which monitors the stable 24-volt DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. When the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 falls below 22 volts, the power outage monitoring unit 315 determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred, and outputs a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) provided in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. As a result, the main control device 162 recognizes the occurrence of a power outage and immediately executes NMI interrupt processing, and further executes power outage processing based on this. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage power supply unit such as a backup capacitor, and when a power outage occurs or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, power for memory retention is supplied from the power outage power supply unit to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. In addition, the power supply and launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when certain launch conditions are met.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and controls the display control device 350, based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The display control device 350 executes display control of the pattern display device 75 based on commands input from the performance control device 143. In this case, the performance control device 143 determines the time for which the patterns are displayed on the pattern display device 75 to vary and the type of combination of patterns to be finally displayed in a stopped state, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also determines whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 75 will be explained with reference to Figures 8 to 10.

As shown in Figures 8(a) to (j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 has three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set in the upper, middle, and lower rows. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper symbol row Z1 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-symbol arranged between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-symbol arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are configured with 18 symbols. In contrast, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main symbol "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1", and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle symbol row Z2 alone is composed of 20 symbols, with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the display screen G is configured so that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols, 3 x 3, being stopped and displayed.

Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen G. The display stops in the order of upper pattern row Z1 → lower pattern row Z3 → middle pattern row Z2, and when the display of all pattern rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a combination of patterns with the same number on any active line, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal 4R jackpot result or a 10R special jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R special jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Also, main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a regular 4R jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

Here, the variable display of each symbol row will be explained with reference to FIG. 10. When a game round starts, first, high-speed variable display starts for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is impossible or difficult to recognize which symbol row is being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the variable displayed symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display as the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and the player waits for a predetermined period.

In a gaming machine, when the symbols are displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device 75, it is common to stop the symbols in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) gradually while slowing down the variable display speed, rather than stopping them suddenly. In this case, if the symbols in middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are configured to start stopping in time with the start of the stopped display on the special symbol display section 43, the time required for the symbols to decelerate to stop on the symbol display device 75 is shortened, resulting in a reduction in the effective stopped display time.

Therefore, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, including the final stop row, are stopped (temporarily stopped) before the special symbol display section 43 starts to display the symbols, and then the temporarily stopped symbols are permanently stopped (determined display) in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol display section 43. The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the provisional stop is different from that in the definitive display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves gently back and forth, or at least a part of the characters (FIG. 8) such as an octopus that make up the main symbol and sub-symbol are moving. In other words, the provisional stop is performed so that the symbols appear to be stationary at first glance, but remain in an incompletely stopped state (stationary display). In contrast, the definitive display is performed so that the symbols do not move back and forth or the characters do not move, and the symbols are completely stopped.

The provisional stop display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may start with a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then proceed directly to a final display. In addition, the provisional stop display may temporarily stop with a stop result that does not correspond to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may change again to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery, and then proceed to a final display.

Incidentally, in a special pattern game run executed by the special pattern display unit 43, the pattern is not temporarily stopped, but the changing pattern is suddenly stopped as the changing display time elapses, and this state (the state in which the pattern is stopped) is maintained until the fixed display time has elapsed. In other words, the stopped display of the pattern in the special pattern display unit 43 remains a fixed display. This is also the case in a regular pattern game run executed by the regular pattern display unit 44.

The manner in which the pattern display device 75 changes is not limited to the above and can be any manner, and the number of pattern rows, the direction in which the pattern changes in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, and the combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot or a miss can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), a hold display section 200 is provided at the bottom of the display screen G for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of holds in the previous play, and the player can recognize the number of holds by visually checking the hold display section 200. The hold display section 200 has a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second hold display area Gb corresponding to the second special symbol.

In the first hold display area Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, with the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62. Specifically, the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, and corresponding to this, the first hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set in the first hold display area Ga.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is one, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second reserve display area Gb, the same number of unit reserve display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is four, and corresponding to this, the first unit reserve display area Gb1, the second unit reserve display area Gb2, the third unit reserve display area Gb3, and the fourth unit reserve display area Gb4 are set in the second reserve display area Gb.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Gb1, and if the number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the second operating port 63 is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Gb4.

In addition, an execution display area D is set between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. A hold image corresponding to the game round to be executed (being executed) is displayed in the execution display area D. For example, when a game round ends and the next game round starts, the hold image displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This allows the player to recognize that the game round that was on hold will be executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during play to perform lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, settings for the display of the special chart display section 43, and settings for the display of the normal chart display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS that determines the variable display time of each special chart display section AS, BS in the special chart display section 43. In addition, it uses a normal chart random number counter C3 used for lottery for whether or not to put the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 into a support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a reserved area Ra for a first special symbol and a reserved area Rb for a second special symbol, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information according to the winning history of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the first to fourth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and information for specifying the number of winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored is stored in this total reserved number storage area.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Regarding each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 199). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 313a, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in the ROM 313. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained with reference to FIG. 12.

In the win/lose table, address information consisting of binary information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information. Specifically, five types of address information are set, expressed in decimal, from "1" to "5," and five types of jackpot numerical information are set, expressed in decimal, from "7," "17," "27," "37," and "47," and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the address information and the jackpot numerical information. The value of each jackpot numerical information is within the range of "0" to "199," which is the range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning/losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only jackpot numerical information with address information "1" is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed, and in the high probability mode, jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one numerical information that will win the jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are five numerical information pieces, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/200, while the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/40, and the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the low probability mode. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss result except for the random number value that wins the jackpot. In addition, the number and value of the random numbers that will result in a win can be any number, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. Here, the jackpot type table will be explained with reference to FIG. 13.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Fig. 13(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 13(b)) are set. When a jackpot is achieved based on winning the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and when a jackpot is achieved based on winning the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, a 4R guaranteed jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed. Here, a round of play is one in which the variable winning control is executed at least once, changing the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then returning it to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once per round of play.

A 4R guaranteed jackpot result is one in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode in the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening and closing execution mode begins). Incidentally, while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

Here, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are modes in which the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high and low when compared in a situation in which game balls are continuously launched into the game area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power lottery using the normal power lottery random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the normal power device 63a opens when the normal power lottery is won is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time for one opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than in the second actuation port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the first actuation port 62. And, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration in which the probability of winning the normal drawing is the same in both modes, and the number of times the normal electric device 63a is opened or the duration of one opening is given preferential treatment compared to the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winning the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode can be set by making any one or any combination of the conditions of the normal drawing, the number of times it is opened, and the duration of opening different.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the upper limit is reached, the high frequency support mode ends, and the support mode switches to the low frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains in the low probability mode. In other words, the game transitions to a game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2's "0" to "64" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, a 10R guaranteed jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. A 10R guaranteed jackpot result results in 10 rounds of play being executed. A 10R guaranteed jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

The 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special design is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type for the first special design. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result occurs as a result of winning the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and this state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g. 100 times).

In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2's "0" to "64" corresponds to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this way, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same whether the type table of the first special chart display section or the type table of the second special chart display section is used. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special chart display section is set to result in a 16R jackpot result, whereas the type table of the first special chart display section is set to result in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, when a special jackpot result is based on winning the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is greater than when a special jackpot result is based on winning the first operating port 62, and it is possible to expect a larger payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the player will play in the hope that, of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, a win will occur in the second actuation port 63, and as a result, the player will pay more attention to the high frequency support mode, in which the frequency of wins in the second actuation port 63 increases.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS when the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing of the operation port 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data of the stop result (the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and when determining the stop result, the data of the multiple stop results corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, so the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special chart display section AS and the second special chart display section BS of the special chart display section 43.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Here, the variable display time table will be explained with reference to FIG. 14.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for a jackpot (Fig. 14(a)) and a variable display time table for a loss (Fig. 14(b)) are set. If the result of the winning/losing lottery based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is a jackpot, the variable display time table for a jackpot is referenced, and if the result of the winning/losing lottery based on winning the actuation ports 62, 63 is a loss, the variable display time table for a loss is referenced.

In each variation display time table, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is set in correspondence with information on the variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 14, to facilitate understanding, information on the variation display time is listed along with the variation pattern, but the information on the variation display time is stored in ROM 313 separately from the variation display time table as time information corresponding to each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the jackpot variation display time table has variation pattern 1A (15 sec), variation pattern 2A (60 sec), variation pattern 3A (60 sec), variation pattern 4A (120 sec), and variation pattern 5A (120 sec) set as selectable variation patterns. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the image variation display is performed in the first special chart display section AS or the second special chart display section BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the variation display of each of the above-mentioned pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the pattern on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

Furthermore, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round presentation such as a reach presentation performed by the pattern display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning presentation, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) A winning presentation, variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SP reach B winning presentation, variation pattern 4A corresponds to an SPSP reach A winning presentation, and variation pattern 5A corresponds to an SPSP reach B winning presentation. In other words, when the presentation control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game round presentation corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the pattern display device 75.

In each of the above-mentioned reach-winning effects, after a reach display is performed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) refers to a display state that makes the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine that has a symbol display device 75 capable of performing a variable display (or a variably displayed) of symbols (pictures), and in which the game state becomes a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the variable display becomes a special display result (jackpot result) in the stage between the start of the variable display (or variably displayed) of the symbols (pictures) in the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of symbols that may result in a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the variable symbol display ends, when the symbols of the final symbol row are displayed with varying symbols, the symbols of the symbol rows other than the final symbol row are displayed on the active line in the display screen G in a manner that constitutes a jackpot symbol combination, thereby forming a reach line.

In the normal reach hit performance, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination after the reach display. The SP reach performance is a higher level reach performance than the normal reach performance, in which a predetermined performance in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined performance, symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the content of the above-mentioned predetermined performance after the reach line is formed differs between the SP reach A performance and the SP reach B performance. The SPSP reach performance is a higher level reach performance than the SP reach performance, in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination after a development performance that develops from the SP reach performance is performed. The SPSP reach A performance develops from the SP reach A performance, and the SPSP reach B performance develops from the reach B performance.

Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 14(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the variable display time table for losing has variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 sec), variable pattern 3H (60 sec), variable pattern 4H (60 sec), variable pattern 5A (120 sec), and variable pattern 6H (120 sec) set as selectable variable patterns. The variable display time is set corresponding to each variable pattern, as in the variable display time table for big wins, but the variable display time corresponding to variable pattern 1H is configured to vary depending on the number of reserved first or second special patterns at that time. Specifically, when variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved patterns is two or less, the variable display time is 8 sec, and when variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved patterns is three or more, the variable display time is configured to be 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

Fluctuation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss on the symbol display device 75, fluctuation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss, fluctuation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach A miss, fluctuation pattern 4H corresponds to an SP reach B miss, fluctuation pattern 5H corresponds to an SPSP reach A miss, and fluctuation pattern 6H corresponds to an SPSP reach B miss.

In the complete miss effect, the symbols are displayed in a miss pattern combination without a reach display. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects, after the reach display, each symbol in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a reach miss pattern combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). In addition, the SP reach A miss effect corresponds to the SP reach A hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach A hit effect is performed, the symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination. In addition, the SP reach B miss effect, the SPSP reach A miss effect, and the SPSP reach B miss effect correspond to the SP reach B hit effect, the SPSP reach A hit effect, and the SPSP reach B hit effect, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for big wins, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, "13" to "28" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for losses, "0" to "59" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "80" to "89" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 6H.

If the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot result, variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP reach B presentation is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss result, variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B presentation is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach B presentation is the reach presentation that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a loss, so it functions as the highest level reach presentation with the highest expectation of a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 5A and fluctuation pattern 6H, the higher the reach effect, the more likely it is to be selected in the event of a jackpot and the less likely it is to be selected in the event of a miss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach A effect < SP reach B effect < SPSP reach A effect.

The normal map random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 250). The normal map random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal map reserve area 314c of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the through gate 64. Then, at a specified timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the normal power device 63a should be controlled to an open state based on the value of the stored normal map random number counter C3. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the normal power device 63a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the normal power device 63a is not controlled to an open state.

<Various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described. The processes of the MPU 312 are roughly divided into main process which is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt process and normal process which are executed to progress the game, and NMI interrupt process which is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal. For the sake of convenience, the NMI interrupt process and timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process and normal process will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
The NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 15. This process is executed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 suspends the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process.

In the NMI interrupt process, first in step S11, data in the usage registers provided in MPU 312 is saved to the backup area of RAM 314. In step S12, a power outage flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage) is set in the backup area. In step S13, the data saved in the backup area is restored to the usage registers of MPU 312, and then the NMI interrupt process is terminated. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the usage registers of MPU 312, the processes of steps S11 and S13 can be omitted.

After the NMI interrupt process is executed, the power outage process is executed by checking that the power outage flag is set in the normal process described below. This process is explained later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 16. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process of the various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Also, if it is judged that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step S104, a winning process for through is executed in response to winning at the through gate 64. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, the value of the regular winning random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the regular reserve area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role objects stored in the regular reserve area 314c is less than four. Also, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, proceed to step S105, execute the winning process for the actuation port associated with winning at actuation ports 62 and 63, and end this timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for the operating port>
The winning process for the operating port in step S105 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step S202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). After that, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

If the result of step S201 is negative (if no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step S206, where it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the second actuation port 63 (initial winning) based on the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second actuation port. If it is determined that a game ball has won the second actuation port 63, a winning ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step S207 to pay out one game ball.

In step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step S209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S206 (no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step S202 or step S207 above is sent to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the start pending memory count N of the corresponding special chart pending areas Ra, Rb is incremented by 1. In step S303, the value stored in the total pending memory count storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common pending number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserved area for the corresponding special chart display section, that is, in the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the first special symbol holding area Ra, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol incremented by 1 in step S302 above.

In addition, when the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Rb for the second special chart, that is, the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart incremented by 1 in step S302 above.

In step S305, a hold read-ahead process is executed to execute the hold notice performance described below. Details of the hold read-ahead process will be described later. After step S305 is executed, this information acquisition process is terminated.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 19. The main processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while an external power source is being supplied, or when an external power source is supplied while the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is in the on state).

First, in step S2001, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control device (such as the dispensing control device 181) to become operable. In the following step S2002, access to the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step S2003, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch of the power supply and launch control device 191 is turned on, and in the following step S2004, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step S2005, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in step S2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step S2005 is compared with the RAM judgment value saved when the power outage occurred, and it is determined whether the two match. If the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as valid. Conversely, if the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be abnormal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 314. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored and held data by whether the keyword written in a specified area of the RAM 314 is saved correctly.

If the RAM judgment value is normal, the process proceeds to step S2007, where the value of the stack pointer stored in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 312, and the state of the stack is restored to the state before the power was cut off. In step S2008, a power restoration command is output to restore the sub-side control device (the payout control device 181, etc.) to the gaming state before the power was cut off. In step S2009, the power outage flag stored in the backup area is erased. After that, in step S2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2003 (if the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative judgment is made in step S2006 (if the RAM judgment value is not normal), the process proceeds to step S2011, where an initialization command is output to initialize the sub-control device (such as the dispensing control device 181). In step S2012, the used area of RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step S2013, the initialization process of RAM 314 is executed. Thereafter, in step S2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 20. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as periodic processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output processing in step S401, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or the commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs jackpot determination, display control of the special chart display unit 43, etc.

In step S404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game number control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In step S405, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal power role 63a provided in the second operating port 63. In this electric role support process, a normal power lottery is executed to determine whether the normal power role 63a should be opened or not using numerical information acquired from the normal power lottery random number counter C3 stored in the normal power lottery reserve area 314c of the RAM 314, and if a lottery is won, the opening and closing process of the normal power role 63a is executed. In addition, the display control of the normal power lottery display unit 44 is performed to inform the result of the normal power lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the normal power device 63a is set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of the support modes is made by the game state transition process described below. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the high-frequency support mode is selected, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

In the electric role support process, whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected is determined by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the normal electric role 63a is opened when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the open state of the normal electric role 63a occurs multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

In step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In step S407, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 15) that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (power outage has not occurred), in step S408, it is determined whether the next timing for executing normal processing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next timing for executing normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314. Also, in step S410, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S408 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

If the determination in step S407 is affirmative (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S411, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S412, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step S413, the power outage flag is set in the backup area.

In step S414, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step S415, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, power for storing and maintaining data in RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in RAM 314 before the power was cut off is retained in the same state for a specified period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Game Play Control Processing>
The game play control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open/close execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is erased when the open/close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If the game is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S502 to S505, the game round progress process in steps S506 to S507, or the game round end process in steps S508 to S509. In other words, if the game is in the open/close execution mode, a special game round will not be started regardless of whether or not a winning combination has occurred in the operating ports 62, 63.

In addition, a game round based on a winning/losing lottery triggered by winning through gate 64 (a normal game round) is executed regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. In other words, while the execution of special game rounds is restricted during the opening/closing execution mode, a normal game round is executed in the same way as when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect. Therefore, if the result of the normal game round during the opening/closing execution mode is a winning result, the second operating port 63 (normal electric device 63a) is opened.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, then in step S502 it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether a change display in progress flag is stored (memorized) in the various flags storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The change display in progress flag is stored when a change display is started for either the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS, and is cleared when the change display ends.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, the process proceeds to step S503, where it is determined whether the common hold number CRN is "0". If the common hold number CRN is "0", this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the game play control process is terminated.

If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb for variable display, and in step S505, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display in the special chart display unit 43 and the variable display in the pattern display device 75, and then this game round control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 22.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN reserved in the second special pattern reserve area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first special pattern (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps S602 to S608, and if the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting processing for the second special pattern (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps S609 to S615.

As already explained, when the common reserved number CRN is 1 or more, the data setting process is performed. The situation in which the data setting process is performed means that at least one of the first start reserved memory number RaN and the second start reserved memory number RbN is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process is configured to first determine whether the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0" or not, and to execute the process related to the reserved information for the first special symbol on the condition that the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0", that is, there is no reserved information for the second special symbol. Therefore, when reserved information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved area Ra and the second special symbol reserved area Rb, the reserved information for the second special symbol (second operating port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is processed preferentially.

In the data setting process for the first special chart, first in step S602, the first start reserved memory number RaN in the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is decremented by 1. In step S603, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower areas.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not a second special pattern flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special pattern flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If the second special pattern flag is stored, the second special pattern flag is erased in step S607.

After execution of step S607 or if a negative judgment is made in step S606 (if the second special chart flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift in the reserved area data has been performed. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the shift command including information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the first special chart reserved area Ra, i.e., information that the reserved area corresponds to the first operating port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

In the data setting process for the second special chart, first in step S609, the second start reserved memory number RbN in the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is decremented by 1. In step S610, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step S611, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol. In step S613, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step S614.

After execution of step S614 or if a positive judgment is made in step S613 (if the second special chart flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143, which is the sub-side control device, recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second special chart, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second operating port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S613 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second reserved display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The high probability mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the mode is the high probability mode, and is set when transitioning to the high probability mode.

If the mode is not the high probability mode, the win/loss determination is made in step S702 by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the low probability mode (e.g., "7"). On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss determination is made in step S703 by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the high probability mode (e.g., "7", "17", "27", "37", "47").

After step S702 or S703 is executed, in step S704, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination in step S702 or S703 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step S705, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, in step S706, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type by referring to the type table for the first special symbol display unit (FIG. 13(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R special jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step S707, the type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 13(b)) is referenced to draw the jackpot type. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of the 10R special jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After step S706 or step S707 is executed, in step S708, a type flag indicating the type of jackpot selected by the lottery in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the type of jackpot selected by the lottery is a 10R special jackpot, a 10R special jackpot flag is stored.

In step S709, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step S704 (if a jackpot has not occurred), the process proceeds to step S710, where a stop result for a miss is set. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a miss is provided, and that stop result is set in step S710.

After execution of step S709 or step S710, in step S711, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

Here, the process for setting the variable display time will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S802, where a variable display time table for a jackpot (FIG. 14(a)) is obtained as a table for drawing the variable display time (variation pattern). On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot but a miss, the process proceeds to step S803, where a variable display time table for a miss (FIG. 14(b)) is obtained.

After step S802 or S803 is executed, in step S804, the variable display time table acquired in step S802 or S803 is used to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern). Specifically, from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step S805, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step S804 is set as the variable display time for the current game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. After step S805 is executed, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23), after execution of step S711, in step S712, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern. As the fluctuation pattern is set separately for a jackpot and a miss (FIG. 14), the performance control device 143 can determine the result of the hit/miss judgment performed by the main control device 162 by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command. In other words, the fluctuation start command includes not only information on the fluctuation display time, but also information on the result of the hit/miss judgment. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step S712 are sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in normal processing (Figure 20). The performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 75, and this determined variable display mode of the patterns is output from the performance control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 so that the variable display of the patterns corresponding to each game round is performed based on the display content command received from the performance control device 143.

In step S713, the display of the special symbol display section 43 starts to change. At that time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is referenced. If the second special symbol flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special symbol, and the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is not stored, the current game round corresponds to the first special symbol, and the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner. After step S713 is executed, this change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 21), if a positive judgment is made in step S502 (if the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a change), the process proceeds to step S506, where it is determined whether the change display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the change display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display of the special chart display section related to the current game round is controlled (the illumination of each display segment is controlled) so that each display segment in the special chart display section related to the current game round is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After execution of step S507, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, a variable end process is executed in step S508. In the variable end process, each special image display unit AS, BS is controlled so that the variable displayed image is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step S709 or step S710.

In step S509, a variation end command is set, and then this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S509 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 20). The performance control device 143 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

<Game Status Transition Processing>
The game state transition process in step S404 (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the opening/closing execution mode. If the game is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the game proceeds to step S902, where it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the variable display in each special chart display section AS, BS has ended (the final display has ended). If it is not the timing for the variable display to end, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is time for the variable display to end, in step S903, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the win/loss determination result is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot determination is made by referring to whether a type flag (step S708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of the current game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, this game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S903 (if the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step S904, and the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set for waiting for the start of the first round while keeping the variable winning device 65 in a closed state. Furthermore, if a high probability mode flag or high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, a process is executed to erase these flags.

In step S905, a process for starting the round display is executed to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In this step, the type of the current jackpot is identified based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step S906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, in step S907, the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step S908, the round counter area RC is set to "10".

After execution of step S907 or step S908, in step S909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in the normal processing (Figure 20).

In step S910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step S901 above (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S911, where it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step S912.

Here, the process of opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the large prize opening 65a is open or not. This determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 65d. If the large prize opening 65a is not open, in step S1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step S1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is "0", proceed to step S1004, and set "15000" to the timer area T as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. In step S1005, set "10" to the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) for the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step S1006, the variable prize drive unit 32c is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step S1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 20).

If the above step S1002 judges positive (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or step S1003 judges negative (if the value of the timer area T is not 0), the large prize opening/closing process ends.

If the above step S1001 judges positive (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step S1008, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step S1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", proceed to step S1009, and determine whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no win has occurred, the large prize opening opening opening process ends. On the other hand, if a win has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1010, and then it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0", the large prize opening opening opening process ends.

If the above step S1008 judges positive (if the value of the timer area T is 0) or step S1011 judges positive (if the value of the prize counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step S1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step S1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step S1014, it is judged whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step S1015 and set the timer area T to "1000" as a value corresponding to the period (2 sec) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step S1016, a close command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 20).

If the above step S1014 judges positive (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step S1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in the closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step S1018, an ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then this large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step S912, it is determined in step S913 whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0," this game state transition process is terminated as is to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process proceeds to step S915 to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27.

First, in step S1101, the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result. If it is a guaranteed jackpot result, in step S1102, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and in step S1103, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to a gaming state in which the win/lose selection mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (a so-called guaranteed jackpot gaming state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After step S1103 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed.

If the result of the negative judgment in step S1101 is (if the current jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot result), that is, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, proceed to step S1104 and set the high frequency support flag in the various flag storage area 314e. If the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set, and the game state (so-called time-saving game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode is transitioned to. In the following step S1105, "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314. This set value is decremented by one each time a special game is played in the time-saving game state, and when the value of the game count counter area becomes "0", the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is erased. Therefore, the time-saving game state ends after 100 game rounds have been played, and then the game state transitions to a game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. After step S1105 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step S915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step S916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step S917, the process of ending the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the process of ending the open/close execution mode, the process of erasing the type flag and the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is executed.

<Pending read-ahead processing>
The reserved ball pre-reading process in step S305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 28. This process is executed when reserved ball information is acquired based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, and a lottery is performed to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the change pattern for the acquired reserved ball information before the execution of the change start process (FIG. 23) corresponding to the reserved ball information.

First, in step S1201, the start reserved memory numbers RaN, RbN stored in each reserved area Ra, Rb of the reserved ball storage area 314b and the common reserved number CRN stored in the total reserved number memory area of the same reserved ball storage area 314b are read, and this information is stored in a register of the MPU 312.

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random number value for determining whether it is a win or a loss) contained in the reserved information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 18) is determined based on the current winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. In step S1203, a win or a loss determination is made using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step S1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the reserved information was acquired is the low probability mode, the win or loss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and if the lottery mode when the reserved information was acquired is the high probability mode, the win or loss table for the high probability mode is referenced to make the win or loss determination.

In step S1204, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination in step S1202 is a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, in step S1205, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (a random number for drawing the jackpot type) included in the pending information acquired based on the current win in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is obtained.

In step S1206, a lottery is performed to determine the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained in step S1205. At this time, if the reserved information is based on winning the first actuation port 62, the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 13(a)) is referenced, and if the reserved information is based on winning the second actuation port 63, the type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 13(b)) is referenced to identify the type of jackpot corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Note that the processing in steps S1203 to S1206 is the same as steps S701 to S707 in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step S1207, jackpot information indicating that a jackpot has occurred and type information indicating the type of jackpot selected in step S1206 are stored in a register of the MPU 312.

After step S1207 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1204 (if the jackpot is not won), in step S1208, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS included in the pending information acquired based on the current winning of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is obtained. In step S1209, a lottery is performed for a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step S1208. At this time, if the pending information acquired corresponds to a jackpot, the fluctuation display time table for jackpots (FIG. 14(a)) is referenced, and if the pending information acquired corresponds to a loss, the fluctuation display time table for losses (FIG. 14(b)) is referenced to identify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Note that the processing in this step is similar to steps S801 to S804 in the processing for setting the fluctuation display time.

In step S1210, the fluctuation pattern information indicating the fluctuation pattern selected in step S1209 is stored in the register of the MPU 312. In step S1211, the hold command is set as the output target to the performance control device 143, and then the hold pre-read process is terminated. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special chart or the second special chart, as well as various information stored in the register (information on the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN, information on the common hold number CRN, jackpot information, type information, and fluctuation pattern information). As already explained, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be determined from the fluctuation pattern, the hold command may be set so as not to include jackpot information. The hold command set in step S1211 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<Electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 has a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, various commands are received, such as hold display control commands such as a shift command and a hold command, game number control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, as well as to the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are mounted.

The MPU 372 analyzes the commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. that are used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into pattern display device 75. VDP375 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc., and reads image data to be stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a specified timing and displays it on pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 30. The effect setting process is a process that is activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main control device 162. The pending command received from the main control device 162 is stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

When making the judgment in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a hold command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a to be read this time. If a hold command is stored (if a hold command has been received), in step S1302, a hold command response process is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 (FIG. 9(b)) of the display screen G. The hold command response process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step S1302 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1301 (a hold command has not been received), in step S1303, it is judged whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a shift command has been received, in step S1304, a shift command response process is executed to shift the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200. Details of the shift command response process will be described later.

After execution of step S1304 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1303 (if a shift command has not been received), in step S1305, a special pattern change display process is executed to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display process will be described later.

In step S1306, processing for the opening and closing execution mode is executed to perform effects during the opening and closing execution mode. In the opening and closing execution mode processing, in addition to the round effects during the opening and closing execution mode, processing is executed to perform opening effects, ending effects, and winning effects when a win occurs in the variable winning device 65.

In step S1307, a process for switching the presentation mode is executed to switch the presentation mode. The details of the process for switching the presentation mode are described later.

In step S1308, other processing is performed, and then the performance setting processing is terminated. In other processing, processing is performed to display a demo screen when a start winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and to switch to a power saving mode that stops the image display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc.

<Pending command processing>
The command response process in step S1302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1401, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and hold information (jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold memory area 344c of the RAM 344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the reserved memory area 344c is provided with a reserved area SRa for a first special symbol and a reserved area SRb for a second special symbol, which correspond to the reserved ball storage area 314b on the main control device 162 side. Each reserved area SRa, SRb has four memory areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. In addition, the reserved memory area 344c is provided with an execution area SAE, which corresponds to the execution area AE on the main control device 162 side.

In step S1401, based on the hold command, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special chart, and which number of the corresponding special chart the hold information is, and the fluctuation pattern information (and, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot information and type information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the hold memory area 344c. For example, if the current hold information is the second hold information corresponding to the first special chart, the fluctuation pattern information etc. is stored in the second storage area of the hold area SRa for the first special chart.

After execution of step S1401, in step S1402, the value of the reserved number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 (start reserved memory number SN) is incremented by 1. In the various counter area 344b, a reserved number counter for the first special design and a reserved number counter for the second special design are provided, and in step S1402, the start reserved memory number SN of the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1403, a setting process for the hold notice is executed to execute the hold notice performance. Here, the hold notice performance is explained with reference to FIG. 33.

In this embodiment, a hold preview effect is performed to notify or suggest the likelihood of a jackpot occurring in the game round to which the hold image corresponds, depending on the display mode of the hold image displayed in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. The display mode of the hold image is set to a normal display mode when the hold preview effect is not performed, and a specific display mode when the hold preview effect is performed, and furthermore, multiple display modes are set for the specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display color (hue) of the pending image indicates the degree of expectation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (e.g., white) is set as the normal display mode, and four types of specific display modes are set: a blue display mode HMb in which the main display color is blue, a green display mode HMc in which the main display color is green, a red display mode HMd in which the main display color is red, and a rainbow display mode HMe in which the main display color is rainbow. Note that in FIG. 33(a), different hatching is used to correspond to the different display colors.

Among the specific display modes, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest probability of a jackpot, followed by the green display mode HMc < the red display mode HMd < the rainbow display mode HMe in that order. The rainbow display mode HMe suggests a jackpot.

In addition, each specific display mode also suggests the effect that will be performed in the game turn to which the reserved image corresponds. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that a reach effect (either a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, or an SPSP reach effect) of a higher rank than a normal reach effect will be performed in the game turn to which the reserved image corresponds, the green display mode HMc suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than an SP reach effect will be performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed.

The above-mentioned hold notice performance using the hold image is performed using at least a part of the period from the start of displaying the hold image that is the subject of the performance to the end of displaying it, in other words, the period from the occurrence of the hold information to the end of the game round of that hold information. There are multiple timings set for the execution of the hold notice performance during the period (hold period) when the hold image is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb, such as when the hold image starts to be displayed or when it is shifted. In addition, multiple timings for the execution of the hold notice performance during the execution of a game round are set as hold change points, as shown in FIG. 33(b). Each hold change point is set to match, for example, the start timing of a game round (change start timing), the start timing of various reach performances, the development timing of the reach performance, etc.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command response process (FIG. 31), the hold notice setting process in step S1403 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice performance for the current hold information, and executes a process to set the display mode of the hold image when the hold notice performance is executed. The hold notice setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S1404, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed to execute the hold notice performance. In the first execution process of the hold notice, the execution control of the hold notice performance is performed based on the setting result of step S1403. Details of the first execution process of the hold notice will be described later.

In step S1405, a process is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that a hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special chart, and information indicating which number the hold information is. After execution of step S1405, the hold command response process is terminated.

<Settings for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced to ascertain the fluctuation pattern, etc. (pre-read result) of the current pending information. In step S1502, based on the fluctuation pattern, etc. ascertained in step S1501, it is determined whether the current pending information corresponds to a jackpot.

If it does not correspond to a jackpot, i.e., if the pending information corresponds to a miss, proceed to step S1503 and determine whether the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss). If a negative judgment is made in step S1503 (if the fluctuation pattern is other than fluctuation pattern 1H) or if a positive judgment is made in step S1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the current presentation mode is identified in step S1504.

Now, the presentation modes will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. In this embodiment, presentation mode A and presentation mode B are set as presentation modes for game presentations executed on display screen G. Presentation mode A and presentation mode B are distinguishable from the player, and for example, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the background image 401 displayed at the back of the hold display section 200 are different in both presentation modes.

These presentation modes can be manually switched by the player, specifically, by performing a specified operation on the presentation operation unit 36 (Fig. 1) during the valid period for mode switching. For example, if a specified operation is performed on the presentation operation unit 36 when the presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation mode will switch to presentation mode B, and if a specified operation is performed on the presentation operation unit 36 when the presentation mode is B, the presentation mode will switch to presentation mode A.

In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the above-mentioned hold notice effect differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and is configured so that the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect in presentation mode A is higher than that in presentation mode B. The configuration for making the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect different is not particularly limited, but for example, a possible configuration is to execute the hold notice effect via an execution lottery in both presentation modes, and then make the probability of winning the execution lottery in presentation mode B when the hold information corresponds to a miss lower than that in presentation mode A.

In this case, in presentation mode B, the proportion of pending notice presentations that correspond to predictions of a jackpot is higher than in presentation mode A, so the likelihood of a jackpot being expected when a pending notice presentation is executed is higher. In other words, presentation mode A can be made to function as a mode in which pending notice presentations are more likely to be executed and are easier to enjoy, while presentation mode B can be made to function as a mode in which pending notice presentations are less likely to be executed but have a higher likelihood of a jackpot being expected when they are executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 35, for example, a reserved image that resembles a game ball may be displayed in presentation mode A, whereas a reserved image that resembles a star may be displayed in presentation mode B. In this way, the base image of the reserved image may be different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the reserved notice (FIG. 34), after the current presentation mode is determined in step S1504, in step S1505, the corresponding reserved notice execution lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. A plurality of reserved notice execution lottery tables are set corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot and the presentation mode. For example, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where it is a miss. Also, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to presentation mode A and corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a miss is set to have a higher probability of winning than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to presentation mode B and corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a miss.

In step S1506, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pending notice performance based on the pending notice execution lottery table obtained in step S1505 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result.

If the result of the lottery is a winning execution, proceed to step S1508 and grasp the corresponding reserved number. In this step, refer to the reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 to grasp whether the reserved information corresponds to the first special chart or the second special chart, and grasp the reserved number of the corresponding special chart. In this case, the reserved number is the number including the reserved information of the current time. For example, if the reserved information of the current time is stored in the third area of the reserved area SRa for the first special chart in the reserved memory area 344c, grasp that the reserved information corresponds to the first special chart and that the reserved number is 3. Note that, when the reserved information of the current time is stored in the first area of the reserved area SRa for the first special chart (when it is the first reserved information), if reserved information is stored in the execution area SAE (when a game round is being executed), grasp the reserved number as 1, and if reserved information is not stored in the execution area SAE (when a game round is not being executed), grasp the reserved number as 0.

In step S1509, a final display mode selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is not only changed once to perform the reserved preview performance, but the display mode of the reserved image is also changed multiple times to perform the reserved preview performance. The final display mode selection table is a table for selecting the final display mode of the reserved image in the reserved preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the final display mode selection table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 36, the "Notes (Performance Mode)" item indicating the game round performance corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience and is not set in the final display mode selection table.

The final display mode selection table includes a final display mode selection table for big wins (Fig. 36(a)) and a final display mode selection table for losses (Fig. 36(b)). Each selection table has a different selection range for the final display mode according to each variation pattern and a different probability of selection for each option.

In the final display mode lottery table for big wins, the range of final display modes of the reserved image in the reserved preview performance is set as follows: if the current reserved information is fluctuation pattern 1A (hit of normal reach), blue display mode HMb and rainbow display mode HMe; if the current reserved information is fluctuation pattern 2A (hit of SP reach A) or fluctuation pattern 3A (hit of SP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, and rainbow display mode HMe; if the current reserved information is fluctuation pattern 4A (hit of SPSP reach A) or fluctuation pattern 5A (hit of SPSP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow display mode HMe. Therefore, when a hold image in blue display mode HMb is displayed as a hold notice effect, it suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than a normal reach effect will be performed in the game turn to which the hold image corresponds (the game turn of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect), when a hold image in green display mode HMc is displayed it suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than an SP reach effect will be performed, and when a hold image in red display mode HMd is displayed it suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed.

In addition, even in the final display mode lottery table for losing, when a reserve image in blue display mode HMb is displayed as a reserve notice effect, it suggests that a reach effect of a rank higher than a normal reach effect will be performed in the corresponding game round, when a reserve image in green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that a reach effect of a rank higher than an SP reach effect will be performed, and when a reserve image in red display mode HMd is displayed, it suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed. Therefore, when a reserve notice effect is performed and a reserve image in blue, green, or red is displayed, the player can predict what level of reach effect will be performed. However, it cannot tell whether or not there will be a jackpot.

In addition, in the final display mode selection table for losing, the rainbow display mode HMe is not set as an option for the final display mode, and the reserved image of the rainbow display mode HMe is displayed only in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, the reserved image of the rainbow display mode HMe suggests a jackpot, and when the reserved image is displayed, the player can predict that a jackpot will occur in the play that the reserved image corresponds to.

In the final display mode lottery table for a jackpot, the probability of selecting the rainbow display mode HMe is kept low (for example, 5%) for all variation patterns. This is to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences, since if the probability of selecting the rainbow display mode HMe is increased, there is a concern that the player will have more opportunities to recognize the jackpot before the game round is played, and will lose interest in the game round presentation. The selection probability for the other options is such that a higher-ranked display mode is more likely to be selected than a lower-ranked display mode in each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode selection table for losing, it is more difficult to select a higher-ranked display mode than in the final display mode selection table for winning. For example, in the variation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP reach A presentation in the final display mode selection table for winning, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas in the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B presentation in the final display mode selection table for losing, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is only 10%.

In the final display mode selection tables for jackpots and misses, the display mode selection tendency is set as described above, so that even if the type of reach effect performed in a game round is the same, the expectation of a jackpot will be higher if a higher display mode is displayed as the reserved image corresponding to that game round.

In this embodiment, a common table is used for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B as the final display mode selection table for a jackpot and a final display mode selection table for a loss, but a different table may be set for each presentation mode.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), in step S1509, a final display mode selection table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the hold information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern, etc., grasped in step S1501. In step S1510, the final display mode for this hold notice performance is selected based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode selection table obtained in step S1509, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

The counter for the lottery is acquired when a hold command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when hold information that is the subject of the lottery process is generated. The same applies to the counters (random numbers) used for other lottery processes executed by the performance control device 143.

In step S1511, a performance scenario selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The performance scenario selection table is a table for selecting a performance scenario for the pending preview performance.

In the performance scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, multiple performance scenarios are set in correspondence with the reserved number and the final display mode of the reserved notice performance. In detail, groups are set from performance scenario 0 corresponding to reserved number = 0 to performance scenario 4 corresponding to reserved number = 4, and in each group, a group of performance scenarios for each color is set in correspondence with the final display modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow. A random number value from 0 to 99 is assigned to each group of performance scenarios for one color. For example, if the reserved number is 0 and the final display mode is the blue display mode HMb, performance scenario 0 blue (1) and performance scenario 0 blue (2) are available for selection, and the one corresponding to the random number value is selected from among them.

Each performance scenario specifies when and in what display mode the reserved image is displayed in the reserved notice performance in which the final display mode has been determined. When the reserved information corresponding to the first special chart is read in advance, the reserved number of the first special chart at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode. Taking the performance scenario 4 red (1) as an example, this scenario specifies that after the reserved image is displayed in the blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 of the first reserved display area Ga (FIG. 9 (b)), when the reserved image is moved and displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2, it is changed to the green display mode HMc, and then, during the period in which the reserved image is displayed in the execution display area D (during the execution of the game round corresponding to the reserved image), it is changed to the red display mode HMd.

Although not shown in Figure 37, a presentation scenario that specifies changing the display mode of the reserved image in the execution display area D also specifies at what timing (at which reserved change point) during a game round the display mode is changed. There are also presentation scenarios that change the display mode multiple times during the execution of a game round. For example, presentation scenario 0 green (2) specifies that the reserved image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb at a previous reserved change point during the execution of a game round, and then further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later reserved change point.

In addition, "G4 (Hold 4)" to "G1 (Hold 1)" in "Notes (Performance Mode)" in FIG. 37 indicate the display mode when a reserved image is displayed in each unit reserved display area of the reserved display section 200. Also, "D (During Play)" indicates the display mode when a reserved image is shifted from the first unit reserved display area to the execution display area D, and the display mode during the period when a reserved image is displayed in the execution display area D. Incidentally, the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column are added for convenience and are not set in the performance scenario lottery table.

In addition, a presentation scenario lottery table for a big win and a presentation scenario lottery table for a loss are set as the presentation scenario lottery table. In this embodiment, a common table is used for presentation mode A and presentation mode B as the presentation scenario lottery table for a big win and a presentation scenario lottery table for a loss, but a different table may be set for each presentation mode. Note that FIG. 37 shows an example of a presentation scenario lottery table for a big win.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), in step S1511, a performance scenario selection table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the hold information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern, etc., grasped in step S1501. In step S1512, a performance scenario for the current hold notice performance is selected based on the number of holds grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the performance scenario selection table obtained in step S1511, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step S1513, the performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected in step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice is terminated. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a hold notice performance should be executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1503 (if the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (complete miss)) or if a negative judgment is made in step S1507 (if the lottery for executing the pending notice performance is a miss), the process proceeds to step S1515, where the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the pending notice is terminated.

<First execution process of pending notice>
The first execution process of the pending notice in step S1404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 38 (a).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the hold notice flag is not stored, i.e., if it is not a situation in which a hold notice performance should be executed, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored and it is a situation where a hold notice performance should be executed, proceed to step S1602, and determine whether it is time to change the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. In other words, determine whether it is a situation where the hold image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above determination is made by referring to the setting result of the performance scenario of the hold notice performance set in step S1513 (Figure 34) above. If it is not a timing to change the display mode, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is the timing for the display mode to change, a lottery is performed in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect. The change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved image will change (rank up). The form of the change suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is performed in the form shown in FIG. 39. First, as shown in FIG. 39(a), a predetermined character image 402 is displayed near the reserved display unit 200 at a predetermined timing before the reserved image changes. Note that, when a change suggestion effect is performed in accordance with the timing of occurrence of reserved information, the reserved image is first displayed in a normal display mode, and the character image 402 is displayed immediately after or at the same time. After that, a video of the character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and the display mode of the reserved image is changed to a higher display mode as shown in FIG. 39(b). Note that the character image 402 is erased after the display mode of the reserved image is changed.

In step S1603, a lottery is performed to select whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect based on the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the result of the selection in step S1603 is a winning result. If the result of the selection is a winning result, in step S1605, the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is set to execute a change suggestion effect. Specifically, a command to execute a change suggestion effect is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

In this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is executed only when the display mode of the pending image is changed, but the change suggestion effect may be executed even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed. In other words, the change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed.

In such a case, for example, a change suggestion effect may be such that, after a specific character image 402 is displayed as shown in FIG. 39(a), the character does not perform a specific action or performs an action different from the specific action, the character image 402 is erased without changing the display mode of the reserved image, and the display mode before the character image 402 was displayed is maintained as it is. However, if such false effects occur frequently, the player's expectations for the change suggestion effect may be lost, so it is advisable to keep the frequency of such effects low. Specifically, the probability of winning the execution of a change suggestion effect when the display mode is not changed is lower than when the display mode is changed; in other words, the frequency with which the display mode of the reserved image does not change when the character image 402 is displayed is lower than the frequency with which it does change.

After step S1605 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1604 (if the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, where the display mode to be changed to in this change process is determined based on the result of the effect scenario settings. Specifically, it is determined in which specific display mode the pending image will be displayed from among the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow display mode HMe.

In step S1607, the display mode of the on-hold image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S1606 above. Note that if this process is performed when a hold command is received (when an additional on-hold image is to be displayed), the initial display mode of the additional on-hold image is set to the display mode determined in step S1606 above.

In this case, if a change suggestion performance is not to be executed, the pending image is set to be displayed in one of the specific display modes indicated by the performance scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, if a change suggestion performance is to be executed, the image is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode indicated by the performance scenario. If the setting process of step S1607 is executed, in step S1405 of the pending command response process (Figure 31), the pending display command to the display control device 350 is set so that the command includes information on the display mode set in step S1607.

In step S1608, information indicating the display mode of the reserved image is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38(b), the display mode storage area 344e has areas corresponding to the reserved information (reserved image) of each special chart and the reserved information during the game, and the display mode of the reserved image can be stored in each area. For example, when the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 of the first reserved display area Ga, the display mode storage area 344e stores information that the second area for the first special chart (the area corresponding to the second reserved information) is displayed in blue display mode HMb. Incidentally, when a change suggestion performance is executed, information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. Note that the display mode storage area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in the corresponding area of the reserved storage area 344c. After execution of step S1608, the first execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

<Shift command processing>
The shift command response process in step S1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1701, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed. This process is intended to change the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance when the hold image is shifted. The process of this step is basically the same as the first execution process of the hold notice (Fig. 38(a)) in step S1404 (Fig. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701, a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if it is a situation where a hold notice performance should be executed, step S1602 determines whether the current shift timing is the timing to change the display mode (display color) of the hold image (the hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. This determination is made based on the setting result of the performance scenario for the hold notice performance set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is the timing to change the display mode, a lottery is held in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, in step S1605, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. After step S1605 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1604 (if the lottery to execute the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, where the display mode to which the change will be made in this change process is determined based on the results of the setting of the effect scenario.

In step S1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S1606. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is set by including information indicating which reserved image's display mode should be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the performance scenario.

In step S1608, for the pending image whose display mode is to be changed, information on the changed display mode is stored in the display mode memory area 344e of the RAM 344. For example, when a pending image in a blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga is changed to a green display mode HMc when shifted to the first unit pending display area Ga1, the blue display information stored in the second area for the first special chart (the area corresponding to the second pending information) in the display mode memory area 344e is erased, and the green display information is stored in the same area.

Returning to the explanation of the shift command response process (FIG. 40), after the process of step S1701 is executed, the second execution process of the pending notice is executed in step S1702. This process is related to the presentation mode switching process of step S1307 (FIG. 30), so it will be described in detail after the explanation of that switching process.

In step S1703, the value of the reserved number counter (start reserved memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of the RAM 344 is decremented by 1. The various counter area 344b is provided with a reserved number counter for the first special design and a reserved number counter for the second special design, and in this step, the start reserved memory number SN of the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1704, a shift process is executed to move the pending image, and then the shift command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the pending information stored in the first area of the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the pending information stored in the second to fourth areas is shifted sequentially to the lower areas. At this time, the display mode information stored in each area of the display mode memory area 344e is also shifted sequentially to the lower areas.

In addition, in the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled to change the display position of the pending image in the pending display section 200 of the display screen G to the lower unit pending display area. For example, if pending images are displayed in the first unit pending display area Ga1 and the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga as shown in FIG. 40(b1) as the state before the control, the display positions of those pending images are changed to the execution display area D and the first unit pending display area Ga1 as shown in FIG. 40(b2) by the control. Note that if the setting is made to change the display mode of the pending image in the first execution process of the pending notice in step S1701, the change in the display position and the change in the display mode are performed together.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step S1305 (FIG. 30) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether a game round is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special chart or the second special chart is currently being played. If neither game round is currently being played, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether a variation start command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. The variation start command contains information about the variation pattern selected by lottery in the variation display time setting process (Figure 24) in the main control unit 162.

By referring to this information on the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to know at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Also, as already explained, since a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern for a miss are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the special chart change display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the change start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1803, where the change start process is executed to start the performance for the game round, and then the special chart change display process is terminated.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed to identify the fluctuation pattern related to the current special game. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time in the current special game is grasped based on the identified fluctuation pattern. In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern is stored. The fluctuation display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the fluctuation display time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (FIG. 14) in the main control device 162, and a common fluctuation display time is assigned to one fluctuation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 1A, the corresponding fluctuation display time is 15 sec in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the fluctuation display time for the current special game.

The presentation pattern table also associates presentation patterns for game round presentations with each variation pattern. The presentation patterns are normal reach hit, SP reach A hit, SP reach B hit, SPSP reach A hit, SPSP reach B hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach A miss, SP reach B miss, SPSP reach A miss, and SPSP reach B miss, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between the variation patterns and the presentation patterns has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, so an explanation is omitted here. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the process for starting the variation, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot, the stop result for the guaranteed jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game round is a miss, the stopping symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are randomly determined. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on one active line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the current stopped symbol and information on the presentation pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 according to the received command so that the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stop with the stopping result determined by the presentation control device 143, or the game round presentation is performed with the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1801 (if a game round is being played), the process proceeds to step S1804, where it is judged whether or not a change end command has been received from the main control device 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time has not yet elapsed in this special game round. In this case, in step S1805, a change in progress process is executed. In the change in progress process, processing is executed to continue the change display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach performance.

In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the current special chart play is the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance. If it is not the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance, the process for displaying the special chart change is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed in step S1807. This process is intended to change the display mode of the reserved image of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance during the execution of the play of that reserved information. The process of this step is basically the same as the first execution process of the hold notice (Fig. 38(a)) in step S1404 (Fig. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1807, the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if it is a situation where the hold notice performance should be executed, step S1602 determines whether it is time to change the display mode of the hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. This determination is made based on the setting result of the performance scenario for the hold notice performance set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is the timing to change the display mode, a lottery is held in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, in step S1605, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. After step S1605 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S1604 (if the lottery to execute the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, where the display mode to which the change will be made in this change process is determined based on the results of the setting of the effect scenario.

In step S1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S1606. As a result, at a predetermined reserved change point during a game round, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the presentation scenario. In the following step S1608, information on the changed display mode is stored in an area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (FIG. 41), after executing the process of step S1807, the third execution process of the pending notice is executed in step S1808. This process is related to the presentation mode switching process of step S1307 (FIG. 30), and will be described in detail after explaining the switching process. After executing step S1808, the special chart change display process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1804 (if a variation end command has been received), it means that the variation display time has elapsed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1809, and variation end processing is executed. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 and the currently executed performance are ended (the patterns of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped).

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the current special chart play is the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance. If it is not the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance, the special chart change display process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance, in step S1811, it is determined whether or not a reserved notice flag or a return waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Details of the return waiting flag will be described later.

If either the hold notice flag or the return waiting flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step S1812. After execution of step S1812 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1811 (if neither the hold notice flag nor the return waiting flag is stored), the special chart change display process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed based on whether a variable end command has been received from the main control device 162. However, since the variable display time can be determined from the variable start command sent at the start of the variable in the performance control device 143, it may also be determined whether the variable display time for the currently running game round has elapsed based on the determined variable display time. In this case, it may also be configured not to send the variable end command from the main control device 162.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The rendering mode switching process in step S1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG 42. The rendering mode switching process is for switching between rendering mode A and rendering mode B already described.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid period for switching presentation modes. In this embodiment, the period during which the SP reach presentation or the SPSP reach presentation is being executed in a special chart game round, or the period during which the open/close execution mode is being executed, is an invalid period during which the presentation mode cannot be switched, and the other periods, including the period during which the special chart game round is being executed, are valid periods for switching presentation modes. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the current timing belongs to the valid period. If it is not within the valid period for switching presentation modes, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated.

If the presentation mode switching is in effect, the process proceeds to step S1902, where it is determined whether a predetermined operation for switching the presentation mode has been performed on the presentation operation unit 36. If the predetermined operation has not been performed, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

When a predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S1903, where a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, when the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B. The presentation mode may be switched in accordance with the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, or in accordance with the timing when the next special game round starts.

In step S1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the presentation mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. In this embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to presentation mode A and presentation mode B, respectively. For example, when switching presentation mode from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the mode A flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step S1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1906, where it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the hold notice flag is not stored, the process for switching presentation modes is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, i.e., if the hold notice performance is being executed or is in a standby state, the process proceeds to step S1907, where the hold notice flag is erased. As a result, if the hold notice performance was being executed before the mode was switched, the continuation of the hold notice performance is canceled. Also, if the hold notice performance was in a standby state, the execution of the hold notice performance that was on standby is canceled.

In step S1908, it is determined whether or not a hold notice performance is being performed, i.e., whether or not there is a hold image being displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an hold image being displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe among the hold images being displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. If there is no hold image being displayed in a specific display mode, the performance mode switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode (if the pending notice performance is being executed), the process proceeds to step S1909, and information indicating in which display mode the pending image being displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the pending display areas Ga1 to Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 and the execution display area D of each special chart, and it is possible to store the display mode of the pending image in each area.

In step S1909, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that time is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

The display mode information may be identification information indicating the display mode or identification information indicating the display color. In short, it is sufficient if the display mode of the pending image can be identified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and it is sufficient if it corresponds to the display mode of the pending image.

By the above process, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the presentation mode, it is possible to know which pending image was displayed in which display mode before switching the presentation mode. Note that when the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed with display mode information stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the display mode information stored in each area of the return area 344f is shifted in sequence to the lower area.

In step S1910, a process is executed to cancel the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode in the specific display mode. That is, the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched. The switching to the normal display mode HMa is performed in accordance with the timing of the switching of the presentation mode. For example, if the presentation mode is switched at the timing when the above-mentioned specified operation is performed, the reserved image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and if the presentation mode is switched at the start of the next special game round, the reserved image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing.

The cancellation process in step S1910 also executes a process to clear the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e. Therefore, at the time of the processing in step S1910, the display mode information is stored only in the return area 344f. Furthermore, the cancellation process in step S1910 also executes a process to erase the performance scenario data set in step S1513 of the setting process for the hold notice (Figure 34).

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is switched, the system is configured to restrict a re-run of the execution lottery for the pending information that has already been acquired, in other words, pending information for which a lottery for executing the pending notice presentation (setting process for the pending notice in FIG. 34) has already been conducted. Specifically, a new lottery for executing the pending notice presentation is not conducted, and the system is configured to prevent duplicate execution lotteries for the same pending information (pending image) from being conducted before and after the presentation mode is switched.

In step S1911, a standby flag for return is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is restored to a specific display mode when the original presentation mode is switched again after the presentation mode is switched. The standby flag for return is a flag indicating that the return process is in a standby state. After step S1911 is executed, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If the above step S1905 is judged to be positive (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S1912, where the process of erasing the return standby flag is executed. Here, a situation in which a positive judgment is made in step S1905 means a situation in which the first switching of the presentation mode is performed while the hold notice presentation is being executed, and then the mode switching operation is performed again, resulting in a return to the original presentation mode. For example, a situation in which the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while any of the hold images is displayed in a specific display mode, and then switched back to presentation mode A. In this case, when the previous mode is switched (from presentation mode A to presentation mode B), the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa and the hold notice presentation is canceled, so that the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode in presentation mode A will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa while in presentation mode B.

In addition, after switching to presentation mode B, the game round for that reserved image (reserved information) may end before switching to presentation mode A. In this case, the return waiting flag is cleared in steps S1811 and S1812 of the special chart change display process (FIG. 41), so a negative judgment is made in the above step S1905.

After step S1912 is executed, in step S1913, a setting process for preview return is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Then, the process for switching the presentation mode is terminated.

<Changing the display mode of the reserved image by switching the performance mode>
As already explained, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is changed while the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the reserved notice presentation is canceled. In this case, the display state of not only the background image 401 but also the reserved display section 200 is changed, so that the change in presentation mode can be easily understood by the player.

In addition, if the switching of the presentation mode is limited to a simple change in the displayed image, it is difficult to impress the difference between the modes on the player, but in this embodiment, the frequency of execution of the hold notice performance is different between the modes, so the difference between the presentation modes can be highlighted. However, in a configuration in which the frequency of execution of the hold notice performance differs between the modes, even if the display mode of the hold image in which the hold notice performance is being performed is the same, the jackpot expectation suggested by the display mode may differ depending on the type of presentation mode. For this reason, if the display mode before the mode switch is maintained after the mode switch, even though the actual expectation of the hold information corresponds to the presentation mode before the switch, it is displayed as if it suggests the expectation corresponding to the presentation mode after the switch, so there is a concern that a mismatch will occur between the expectation suggested by the hold notice performance and the actual expectation. In this regard, by changing the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched, such inconsistency in expectation can be suitably avoided.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the hold preview effect when the presentation mode is switched, it is possible to make the change in presentation mode easier to understand and to avoid inconsistencies in the level of expectation suggested by the hold preview effect. On the other hand, however, there is a concern that some players may mistakenly believe that the cancellation of the hold preview effect has meant that the chance suggested by the hold preview effect has also disappeared, leading to disappointment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a setting process for returning to the preview in step S1913, a second execution process for the on-hold preview in step S1702, and a third execution process for the on-hold preview in step S1808 are provided, and the display mode of the on-hold image is restored when the original presentation mode is returned to by switching again after the presentation mode has been switched. The process of each of the above steps is explained in detail below.

<Settings for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step S1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, the display status of the reserved image displayed in each reserved display area Ga, Gb and execution display area D before the specific display mode is released and the normal display mode HMa is recognized. For example, if the fourth reserved image for the first special chart (reserved image in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and then switched back to presentation mode A, it is recognized that the reserved image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

In this case, if the number of play times has been played and the reserved image has shifted to the lower area after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, it is determined that the reserved image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 at the time of the mode switch was displayed in blue display mode HMb before the release process. For example, if two play times have been played after switching to presentation mode B, it is determined that the reserved image displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 was displayed in blue display mode HMb at the time of the mode switch. This determination is made by referring to the return area 344f of RAM 344.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not a play round of the reserved image (target reserved image) that was displayed in a specific display mode is being played. In other words, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, it is determined whether or not a play round has been played and the game has progressed to the play round of the target reserved image. If a play round is not being played, the process proceeds to step S2103, where the number of reserved information items before the target reserved image (reserved number) is determined. For example, if the target reserved image is the third reserved information, the number of reserved information items before that is determined to be two. Note that reserved information items that are currently playing a play round are not included in the reserved number. Also, the number of reserved items is determined separately for the first special chart and the second special chart.

In step S2104, it is determined whether the number of reserved items determined in step S2103 above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 1 item). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S2105, where a lottery process for a return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at what shift timing the target reserved image is returned to its original specific display mode.

In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a restoration scenario table is stored which defines the timing for restoring the display mode of the reserved image to the original state in correspondence with the number of reserved items and the original specific display mode. In the restoration scenario table, for example, in correspondence with the number of reserved items being two, the restoration timing of the display mode can be selected from the first shift (shift to the second unit reserved display area Ga2), the second shift (shift to the first unit reserved display area Ga1), and the third shift (shift to the execution display area D).

In addition, in the reversion scenario table, if the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, it is possible to select whether to revert directly from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode, or to revert gradually to the original specific display mode. Thus, there are cases where a reversion to the specific display mode before release is made by a single pending change display, and cases where a reversion to the specific display mode before release is made after multiple pending change displays.

In step S2105, the timing and state of return of the display state of the pending image are selected by lottery based on the return scenario table and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

After execution of step S2105 or if a negative judgment is made in step S2104 (if the number of reserved items is less than one), a return scenario setting process is performed in step S2106. If a return scenario lottery process is performed in step S2105, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be restored in the selected return scenario, and if the number of reserved items is less than one, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be restored when shifting to the execution display area D.

After execution of step S2106 or if a positive judgment is made in step S2102 (if a game round of the target reserved image is being played), in step S2107, a notice return flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that processing should be performed to return the display state of the reserved image to the original state. After execution of step S2107, the setting process for notice return is terminated.

<Second execution process of pending notice>
The second execution process of the reserved notice in step S1702 (FIG. 40(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 44. This process is performed as part of the shift command response process, in other words, it is a process executed at the shift timing of the reserved image.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a notice return flag is not stored, the second execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2202, where the return scenario set in step S2106 in the setting process for the notice return is determined. In step S2203, based on the setting result of the return scenario determined in step S2202, it is determined whether or not the current shift timing is the timing to return the display mode of the target hold image. If it is not the timing to return, the second execution process for the hold notice is terminated.

If it is time to return, proceed to step S2204, and determine the display mode to which the change will be made based on the setting results of the return scenario. For example, if the display mode before the release of the target pending image is the green display mode HMc, and the display mode determined by the return scenario is the green display mode HMc, the green display mode HMc is determined as the display mode to which the change will be made. Also, if the display mode determined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is the precursor to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is determined as the display mode to which the change will be made.

In step S2205, the display mode of the target reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S2204. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is set by including information indicating the reserved image whose display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. After execution of step S2205, the second execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

<Third execution process of pending notice>
The third execution process of the reserved notice in step S1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45. This process is performed as part of the special chart change display process, in other words, it is a process performed during the execution of the game round.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a notice return flag is not stored, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2302, where it is determined whether or not a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Promotion flags will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2303, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target reserved image is the normal display mode HMa. Note that the current display mode of the target reserved image is the normal display mode HMa when a switching operation to the original presentation mode is performed during the execution of a game round of the target reserved image.

If the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, proceed to step S2304 to determine whether or not there are any reserved change points remaining in the ongoing game round. For example, if there are no reserved change points remaining, such as when the presentation mode is changed at the end of a game round of the target reserved image, proceed to step S2314 to erase the notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. This cancels the return process of the reserved notice presentation, and the target reserved image (the reserved image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for that game round.

If a hold change point remains, in step S2305, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the specific display mode of the target hold image before release, and this is determined as the display mode to which it will be changed. In step S2306, the display mode of the hold image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S2305. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the hold image is set as an output command to the display control device 350, including information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before release at the most recent hold change point.

After execution of step S2306 or if a negative judgment is made in step S2303 (if the current display mode of the target pending image is not the normal display mode HMa), step S2307 judges whether or not a judged flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Note that if the current display mode of the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa, this means that the display mode of the pending image has already been changed to the specific display mode before release.

If it is determined in step S2307 that the determined flag is stored, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated. On the other hand, if the determined flag is not stored, the promotion process of the pending notice is executed in step S2308.

Here, the process for promoting the pending notice in step S2308 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 46.

In the promotion process, first, in step S2401, the change pattern of the target reserved image is grasped. This is done based on the change start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) sent from the main control device 162 at the start of a play round (a play round currently being performed) of the target reserved image.

In step S2402, a promotion judgment of the hold notice performance is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S2401 and the promotion judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The promotion judgment is to judge whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) to a higher specific display mode (a higher display mode than the display mode before release).

As shown in Figure 47, the promotion determination table has an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 5H, which corresponds to a missed SPSP reach A, a change up to the red display mode HMd is permitted. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, a change up to the rainbow display mode HMe is permitted in all of variation patterns 1A to 5A.

The promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations, such as a different upper limit display mode for each fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot. In short, it is sufficient that the upper limit display mode is determined so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation of that play count (fluctuation pattern) (in other words, so as to be consistent with the jackpot expectation).

In step S2402, the promotion determination table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern grasped in step S2401, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target reserved image is a display mode lower than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode, the display mode is allowed to be promoted, and if not, promotion is not allowed. Note that if a change in the display mode has been set in step S2306, it is determined whether the display mode after the change is a display mode lower than the identified upper limit display mode, and based on the result, it is determined whether promotion is possible.

After step S2402 is executed, in step S2403, a judged flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The judged flag is set so that the MPU 342 knows that a promotion judgement has been executed, in other words, to avoid duplicate promotion judgements.

In step S2404, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step S2402 allows the display mode to be promoted. If promotion is not allowed, the process exits from the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step S2314 (FIG. 45), where the notice return flag is cleared and the third execution process for the pending notice is terminated.

If promotion is permitted, the process proceeds to step S2405, where a lottery process for a promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines the timing (hold change point) at which the target reserved image displayed in the execution display area D is changed to which display mode. A promotion scenario lottery table for lottery-drawing a promotion scenario is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and in this promotion scenario lottery table, in addition to information for execution lottery for lottery-drawing whether or not to execute a promotion performance, multiple types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the reserved notice performance. In step S2405, an execution lottery for whether or not to promote the display mode and a scenario lottery for promotion are executed based on the promotion scenario lottery table and the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344.

In step S2406, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process in step S2405 is to upgrade the display mode. If not, the process exits the pending notice upgrade process and proceeds to step S2314 (Figure 45), where the notice return flag is cleared and the pending notice third execution process is terminated.

If a promotion is to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2407, and promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step S2405 is executed. After step S2407 is executed, in steps S2408 to S2410, processing related to the change suggestion presentation is executed. These processes are similar to steps S1603 to S1605 in the first execution process of the pending notice (Figure 38 (a)), and therefore a description thereof is omitted.

After execution of step S2410 or if a negative judgment is made in step S2409, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step S2411, and then the process for promoting the hold notice is terminated. The promotion flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that the display mode of the target hold image should be promoted.

Returning to the explanation of the third execution process of the pending notice (Figure 45), after the pending notice promotion process is executed in step S2308, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2302 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2309, where it is determined whether or not it is time to promote the display mode. This judgment is made based on the result of the promotion scenario setting in step S2407. If it is not time to promote, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the time to promote, proceed to step S2310, and determine the display mode to which the current change process will be changed (higher display mode) based on the promotion scenario setting results. In the following step S2311, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S2310. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set so as to include information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350.

In step S2312, it is determined whether the display mode determined in step S2310 or the display mode set as the destination in step S2311 is the final display mode in the promotion performance. For example, if the promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages by multiple change processes, and if the current change process is an intermediate process, it is determined that the display mode is not the final display mode, and the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the final display mode, in step S2313, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. In the following step S2314, the notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

<Flow of display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The flow of display modes of pending images when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Figures 48 to 50.

When three reserved information for the first special chart have been acquired and a winning entry occurs in the first operating port 62, and the fourth reserved information (reserved image HW) is acquired, the main control device 162 executes a reserved pre-reading process (step S305) for the reserved information acquired. Here, it is assumed that the result is that the win/loss judgment is a miss, and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B miss).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for the hold notice (step S1403) based on the results of the look-ahead in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold image HW, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the performance scenario, etc. As a result of these lotteries, it is assumed that the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and a scenario is selected in which the display is initially in the green display mode HMc and is changed to the red display mode HMd at a later shift timing as the performance scenario. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the hold image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. At that time, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the display mode of the pending image HW, which was the green display mode HMc in presentation mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, the presentation control device 143 stores information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the pending image HW before the mode switching in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. Note that FIG. 48(b) shows a case where the presentation mode is switched in the middle of a game round in which the pending information of the pending image HW was obtained.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the presentation control device 143 executes the setting process for the preview return (step S1913) based on the information stored in the return area 344f, grasps the original display mode (green display mode HMc), draws a return scenario, etc. As a result of the scenario drawing, it is assumed that a scenario has been selected in which the display is initially in the normal display mode HMa, and then changes to the original display mode, the green display mode HMc, at the subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49(a), at the time of switching to presentation mode A, the on-hold image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa. If the selected return scenario changes the display mode of the on-hold image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and then to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 49(b), at the time the on-hold image HW is shifted to the second unit on-hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the on-hold image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc. This causes the display mode of the on-hold image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa when switching to presentation mode B, to be returned to the display mode before switching to presentation mode B.

After switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the execution lottery for the change suggestion presentation (Figure 39) that suggests a change in the display mode of the reserved image (rank up) is not held until the play of the reserved image HW is started. Therefore, when the display mode is changed to the blue display mode HMb or the green display mode HMc, the change suggestion presentation is not held.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step S1808), and performs the following operations: grasping the fluctuation pattern of the reserved image HW, grasping the upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern, and determining whether to promote it to a higher display mode.

The change pattern of the pending image HW is change pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (Figure 47), so in the promotion judgment, the promotion of the display mode is permitted on the basis that the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is a mode lower than the upper limit display mode. As a result, as shown in Figure 50 (b), at a predetermined pending change point in the play round of the pending image HW, the display mode of the pending image HW displayed in the execution display area D is changed to the red display mode HMd, i.e., a mode higher than the original display mode. At that time, if the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect is won, the change suggestion effect is performed and then the change to the red display mode HMd is made.

The red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed in the play round of the reserved image. Here, the change pattern of the reserved image HW is change pattern 6H, which corresponds to the SPSP reach B miss effect, so that an SPSP reach B effect will be performed in the play round of the reserved image HW, and the suggestion by the reserved image HW and the actual play round effect are consistent.

In addition, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the game round of the reserved image HW may end without switching back to presentation mode A. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the execution of the hold notice performance is cancelled by switching the performance mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the display mode of the target hold image HW is then restored to the original specific display mode by transitioning back to the original performance mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the reserved read-ahead process, so that the player's expectation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as the specific display mode so that the jackpot expectation degree is different, the expectation degree can be suggested by giving it a large or small value, and this configuration is advantageous in arousing the player's expectation. In addition, since the mode is switched between the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In this configuration, there is a concern that if the execution of the reserved notice presentation is canceled, the presentation mode is switched during the execution of the reserved notice presentation (the presentation in which the reserved image is set to a specific display mode), which may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation degree that was notified or suggested by the presentation has disappeared. In this case, it is possible to limit the switching of the presentation mode during the execution of the reserved notice presentation, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the presentation mode decreases, and the significance of providing multiple types of presentation modes may be lost.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of the hold notice performance is cancelled by switching the performance mode, and then the performance mode is switched back to the original mode in this state, the target hold image HW that was changed to the normal display mode HMa is returned to the original specific display mode, so that the expectation level can be notified again. This makes it possible to inform the player that the expectation level has not disappeared, and the hold notice performance can be executed without imposing restrictions on switching the performance mode. In other words, it becomes possible to optimally achieve both the execution of the hold notice performance and the switching of the performance mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when a hold notice performance is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original performance mode is restored, the notification mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the return area 344f of the RAM 344. This makes it possible to preferably restore the display mode of the hold image, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, to the original specific display mode when the original performance mode is restored.

When making the above settings, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, regardless of the result of the pending pre-read process performed on the target pending image.

For example, when transitioning from presentation mode A to presentation mode B and then back to presentation mode A, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set based on the results of the reserved pre-read performed in the previous presentation mode A, it is expected that the display mode will be set to a different mode from the display mode in the previous presentation mode A. In this case, since the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the later presentation mode A does not match the display mode in the previous presentation mode A, it is difficult for the player to understand that the released reserved notice performance has returned. In particular, in a configuration in which the display mode of the reserved image can be changed gradually, even with the same pre-read result, differences may occur in the display mode of the reserved image (reserved notice performance) at the time of switching depending on the timing of switching the presentation mode, so if the display mode in the later presentation mode A is set based on the results of the reserved pre-read process, a mode different from the display mode in the previous presentation mode A is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, not the result of the hold pre-read process, so when transitioning to the later presentation mode A, it can be set to the same display mode as the one actually displayed in the earlier presentation mode A. This allows for optimal alignment between the display mode in the earlier presentation mode A and the display mode in the later presentation mode B, making it easier for the player to recognize that the display mode (hold notice presentation) has returned.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is to be restored to the original specific display mode by a subsequent transition to presentation mode A, the presentation scenario (return scenario) for changing the display mode of the target pending image HW from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode is reset.

When the target reserved image HW is returned to its original specific display mode in the subsequent presentation mode A, the period from when the subsequent presentation mode A is switched to until the end of the game round of the target reserved image HW, i.e., the remaining period during which the target reserved image HW continues to be displayed, is expected to vary depending on the length of time spent in the immediately preceding presentation mode B. In this regard, in this configuration, the presentation scenario is reset when the target reserved image HW is returned to its original specific display mode, so that the target reserved image HW can be suitably changed to its original specific display mode even when the remaining period varies.

In the above case, the number of pending images before the target pending image HW is determined, and the performance scenario is reset based on the results.

In this case, the presentation scenario can be reset after properly understanding the remaining period, and the target pending image HW can be suitably changed to the original specific display mode regardless of the duration of stay in presentation mode B.

In the subsequent presentation mode A, the target pending image HW can be restored to the original specific display mode, and then promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested expectation) in the later presentation mode A is limited to the display mode in the earlier presentation mode A, preventing the range of suggestible expectation from narrowing. In that case, if a higher specific display mode is suddenly used, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the hold notice presentation in the earlier presentation mode A, and the presentation may become difficult to understand. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to first use the original specific display mode and then change to a higher display mode, making it easy to understand that the display mode of the target hold image HW has returned (the released hold notice presentation has returned), preventing player confusion.

In the above case, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is not simply promoted, but a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote it to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image HW, and whether or not to promote it to a higher mode is determined based on the result of the promotion. This makes it possible to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW while aligning it with the game play performance (reach performance, etc.) that is actually performed in the game play of the target reserved image HW.

It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved image will change to a higher mode, and it is configured to restrict the execution of the change suggestion effect when the display mode of the target reserved image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by transitioning to the original display mode.

Because the change suggestion effect suggests that the display mode will change to a higher level, the player's expectation of the change to a higher level is aroused, and the player's attention to the reserved image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the target reserved image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the previous performance mode A and is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc in the subsequent performance mode A, if a change suggestion effect is performed, it is assumed that the player will associate the higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe) with the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in the previous performance mode A that he or she remembers as a reference, even though the display mode is actually returned to the original specific display mode. In this case, the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target reserved image HW is a display mode lower than the mode associated with it by the player, which may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher-level display mode, if the change is simply a return to the display mode in the previous presentation mode A, the change suggestion presentation is not executed, which prevents the player from associating the higher-level presentation mode with the actual display mode, and thus makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

The likelihood of the hold notice effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the jackpot expectation change when the presentation mode is switched, so the difference between presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the appearance is changed only by changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, if the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is kept in the specific display mode (while the ongoing hold notice presentation is continued), there is a risk that the expectation suggested by the target hold image HW will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, by canceling the execution of the hold notice presentation when the presentation mode is switched, such inconsistency in the expectation can be suppressed, but this time, there is a concern that the player will be misled and anxious that even the expectation suggested by the specific display mode has disappeared. By applying this embodiment (such as a configuration in which the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode by switching to the original presentation mode) to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be preferably exerted.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, when a reserved image in a specific display mode exists, for example, when switching is performed from one of the presentation modes A and B to the other, the display mode of the reserved image before the switching is stored, and the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode. After that, when switching is performed again to the original presentation mode (one of the presentation modes) before the game round of the reserved image ends, a restoration process of the display mode of the reserved image is performed based on the information of the display mode stored at the time of the previous switching (switching to the other presentation mode), and the reserved image is changed to the original specific display mode or to a higher specific display mode.

During the period between the previous switch and the subsequent switch (re-switch to the original presentation mode), i.e., the period during which the display mode restoration process is pending, the player is playing, and so new pending information may be generated. In this embodiment, the handling of the pending notice presentation for this new pending information differs from the first embodiment described above. This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that are similar to those in the first embodiment described above, and their description will be omitted.

<Pending command processing>
The hold command response process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 51. This process is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command (when hold information occurs), and is executed in place of the hold command response process of Fig. 31. In Fig. 51, the same processes as those in Fig. 31 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, the value of the reserved number counter (start reserved memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The return standby flag is for MPU 342 to know that the state is waiting for the return process (processing for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the original specific display mode), and is stored in the various flag storage area 344d during the waiting period of the return process. The waiting period of the return process includes the period from when the presentation mode A or the presentation mode B is switched from one to the other and when it is switched back to the original presentation mode (staying period in the other presentation mode), as well as the period from when it is switched to the other presentation mode until the game play of the target reserved image (the reserved image that is the target of the display mode return process) ends without being switched back to the original presentation mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2601 (the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1403, where the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, settings are made to execute the hold notice performance for the generated hold information.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2601 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2602 without executing the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, in this embodiment, if new hold information occurs during the standby period of the return process, the execution of the hold notice performance for that hold information is restricted.

The hold information is read ahead by the hold read ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control unit 162, just like other hold information. Therefore, although the performance control unit 143 forcibly sets the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the read ahead results such as the change pattern are in a state obtained by the hold command from the main control unit 162.

In step S2603, the information occurring during the restriction is stored in correspondence with the generated pending information. The information occurring during the restriction indicates that the information occurred during the restricted period. The process of step S2603 is performed, for example, by storing the information occurring during the restriction together with pending information such as the change pattern in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is performed, the information occurring during the restriction is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information. This makes it possible to know which pending image occurred during the restricted period even if the display area of the pending image is shifted by the shift process. The information occurring during the restriction may be stored in a memory area other than the pending memory area 344c after it is possible to recognize which pending information it is.

After execution of step S2603, in step S1405, processing is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S2602, the hold image for hold information generated during the restricted period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

If the above step S2601 makes a negative judgment (if it is not during the restricted period) and the process goes through the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403 and the first execution process for the hold notice in step S1404 to reach step S1405, the hold image will be displayed in the display mode set in those processes.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The rendering mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 52. This process is executed in step S1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30) in the rendering control device 143, and is executed instead of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42. In Fig. 52, the same processes as those in Fig. 42 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

After executing the switching process of the presentation mode in step S1903, in step S1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set. In the following step S1905, it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. Note that when the switching process of step S1903 is executed, a situation in which a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d means that after the presentation mode is switched (the previous switching), the original presentation mode has been switched back. Conversely, a situation in which a return standby flag is not stored means that the previous switching has been performed (the original presentation mode has not yet been switched back).

If it is determined in step S1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (the previous switch has been performed), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the processes of steps S1906 to S1911 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the return standby flag is stored (if re-switching has occurred), the process proceeds to step S1912, where the return standby flag is erased from the various flag storage area 344d. This releases the restricted state of the hold notice presentation. Therefore, for hold information that occurs after this release, the setting process for the hold notice presentation (step S1403) and the like is executed at the time the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step S1913, the setting process for the advance notice return is executed, and in the following step S2701, it is determined whether or not there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period. This determination is made based on the information that occurred during the restricted period stored in step S2603 of the pending command processing (Figure 51).

If there is no pending information generated during the restricted period, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated. On the other hand, if there is pending information generated during the restricted period, a second setting process for pending notice is executed in step S2702, and then the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for hold notice in step S2702 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 53.

First, in step S2801, the pending information that occurred during the restricted period is identified. That is, based on the information generated during the restricted period, it is determined which pending information that exists at that time occurred during the restricted period.

After executing the process of step S2801, the process from step S2802 onwards is executed for the pending calls that occurred during the identified restricted period. Note that since most of the processes from step S2802 onwards are similar to the processes in the setting process (Fig. 34) for the pending notice in step S1403 (Fig. 51), the explanation of the common processes will be simplified and the different processes will be explained in detail.

In steps S2802 to S2804, the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern in pending occurrences during the limited period, and whether or not a jackpot has been won. In step S2805, the presentation mode after switching is determined. For example, if the re-switch is from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, presentation mode A is determined as the presentation mode after switching.

In steps S2806 to S2808, a hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the switched performance mode identified in step S2805 is obtained, and a lottery is held to execute the hold notice performance. If the execution lottery is won, in steps S2809 to S2814, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice performance is determined, and the process (performance scenario) leading up to the display of the final display mode is determined.

In this case, if the final display mode selection table for selecting the final display mode or the presentation scenario selection table for selecting the presentation scenario differs for each presentation mode, the table corresponding to the presentation mode after switching identified in step S2805 is obtained and the selection is performed. Although the hold that occurred during the limited period occurred in the presentation mode before switching, the selection for the execution of the hold notice presentation and the selection of the final display mode are performed according to the conditions set for the presentation mode after switching.

In step S2815, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this manner, a process is executed to change the display mode of the hold notice to a specific display mode in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) or in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1807 in the special chart change display process (FIG. 41). In other words, the hold notice performance for the hold information that occurred before the mode switch will be performed in the performance mode after the switch.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 54. This process is executed in step S1305 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30) in the performance control device 143, and is executed instead of the special chart change display process in Fig. 41. In Fig. 54, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This process is provided as a measure to deal with the case where the play round for the target reserved image (the reserved image that is the subject of the display mode restoration process) ends without switching back to the original presentation mode.

After executing the processing for the end of the variation in step S1809, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the current special chart play round is the play round of the reserved information (the reserved image that is the target of the display mode return processing) that triggered the reserved notice performance. If it is the play round of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not a reserved notice flag or a return waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If either the reserved notice flag or the return waiting flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step S1812. This cancels the return processing and releases the restricted state of the reserved notice performance.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period. If there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period, the process proceeds to step S2902, where it is determined which pending information occurred during the restricted period. The processes in steps S2901 and S2902 are performed based on the pending information that occurred during the restricted period stored in step S2603 of the pending command process (Figure 51).

In step S2903, a setting process for the hold notice is executed for the hold that occurred during the limited period identified in step S2902. This process is similar to the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403 (FIG. 51) (FIG. 34), and performs setting process for executing the hold notice presentation corresponding to the current presentation mode.

In other words, if the restricted state is released without switching back to the original presentation mode, the conditions set for the presentation mode currently in use are applied to the lottery for the execution of the pending notice presentation and the lottery for the final display mode. For example, if the previous switch was from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the conditions set for presentation mode B are applied to perform the lottery for the execution of the pending notice presentation, etc. After execution of step S2903 or if a negative judgment is made in step S2902 (if there is no pending information generated during the restricted period), the special chart change display process is terminated.

<About the flow of display of pending images corresponding to pending occurrences during the restriction period>
The flow of display modes of pending images corresponding to pending occurrences during a restricted period will be described with reference to Figure 55.

When the fourth hold information of the first special chart occurs in the presentation mode A, the main control unit 162 performs a hold pre-read process (step S305), and the presentation control unit 143 performs a setting process for the hold notice (step S1403). As a result, when a hold notice presentation in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 55(a), a hold image HA in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

When a player performs a mode switching operation during a game in which the hold information corresponding to the hold image HA has been acquired, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the display mode of the hold image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

And, while the presentation mode is maintained at presentation mode B, two new pieces of pending information are generated during the period until the pending image HA is shifted to the second unit pending display area Ga2. For these newly generated pending pieces of information, the presentation control device 143 does not perform the setting process for the pending notice, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, since the execution of the pending notice presentation is restricted, as shown in FIG. 55(c), the pending images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated pending information are displayed in the third unit pending display area Ga3 and the fourth unit pending display area Ga4, respectively, with their display mode set to the normal display mode HMa.

The main control device 162 performs a hold pre-read process for the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 at the timing of acquisition of the hold information, just like other hold information. The results of the pre-read are notified to the performance control device 143 via a hold command, so although the performance control device 143 is not in a state where it is performing setting processing for hold notices, it is in a state where it has acquired the results of the pre-read process for the hold information.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the presentation control device 143 executes the second setting process for the hold notice (step S2702) for the hold images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process for the hold notice is to draw a lottery for the execution of the hold notice presentation, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the presentation scenario, etc. based on the pre-reading result notified by the main control device 162 at the timing of acquiring the hold information. When conducting these draws, the lottery table used is the one corresponding to the presentation mode A, which is the presentation mode after the switch. In other words, although the hold information for the hold images HB1 and HB2 was acquired in a situation where the presentation mode was B, the lottery for the hold notice presentation for them applies the lottery conditions set for the presentation mode A, which is the mode when the hold notice presentation is executed.

If the result of the above lottery is, for example, that the hold preview performance will not be performed for the hold image HB1, and the hold preview performance will be performed for the hold image HB2 with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb, then as shown in FIG. 55(d), the display mode of the hold image HB1 will be maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the hold image HB2 will be changed to the blue display mode HMb.

The on-hold image HA corresponding to the on-hold information acquired in presentation mode A before transitioning to presentation mode B is changed to the original display mode, that is, the green display mode HMc, by the presentation control device 143 performing a setting process for the return of the notice (step S1913) and a second execution process for the on-hold notice (step S1702).

Also, unlike when switching to presentation mode A as described above, if the state shown in FIG. 55(c) is reached and presentation mode B is maintained while the play round for the reserved image HA (the play round for the final reserved information acquired in the previous presentation mode A) ends, the restricted state ends with the end of that play round. In this case, at the end of that play round, a second setting process for the reserved notice is executed for the reserved images HB1 and HB2. At this time, various selections such as the selection for the execution of the reserved notice presentation, the selection for the final display mode, and the selection for the presentation scenario are performed using a selection table corresponding to presentation mode B. In other words, selection conditions different from those in FIG. 55(d) are applied.

If, as a result of the above lottery, for example, a hold notice performance is executed for hold image HB1 with the display mode being the blue display mode HMb, and a hold notice performance is not executed for hold image HB2, then as shown in FIG. 55(e), the display mode of hold image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of hold image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

For the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during a restricted state in which the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is set based on the results of the hold pre-reading process executed during the restricted state.

In this embodiment, if the presentation mode is switched while the pending notice presentation is being executed, the execution of the pending notice presentation is restricted until the presentation mode is switched back to the original presentation mode. If new pending information is acquired in this restricted state, and such pending information is not changed to a specific display mode, there is a concern that it may not be possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the pending information acquired in the restricted state.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the display mode of the reserved images HB1, HB2 corresponding to the reserved information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific display mode after the restricted state ends, thereby stimulating the player's sense of anticipation regarding the reserved information acquired during the restricted state. In this case, the change to the specific display mode after the restricted state (execution of the reserved notice presentation) is performed based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process executed during the restricted state, so the reserved read-ahead process can be performed in the same way as when the restricted state is not in effect. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the reserved read-ahead process, it is possible to execute the reserved notice presentation triggered by the reserved information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The system is configured so that the hold pre-read process for acquired hold information is performed according to the timing of acquisition of the hold information, regardless of whether the hold information is in a restricted state or not.

In this case, the hold read-ahead process can be performed according to the timing of acquisition of the hold information whether the state is restricted or not, so there is no need to distinguish between the hold read-ahead process in the former and latter cases. This makes it possible to execute a hold notice performance triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state is set (hold notice effect setting) is configured to be executed when the restricted state ends.

For example, when setting the display mode after the restricted state based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process executed during the restricted state, it is not impossible to execute the setting during the restricted state. However, if a play round of reserved images HB1, HB2 for which the display mode has been set is executed during the restricted state, the display period of the reserved images will end without the display mode setting being reflected, and there is a risk that the setting will be wasted. In this regard, with the present configuration, the display mode is set when the restricted state ends, preventing such waste from occurring and enabling efficient processing.

When pending information is acquired during a restricted state, information occurring during restriction indicating that the pending information was acquired during a restricted state is stored in the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know after the restricted state that the pending information was acquired during the restricted state based on the information generated during the restricted state stored in the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if pending information acquired before the restricted state and pending information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the restricted state ends, it is possible to easily identify the pending information acquired during the restricted state. As a result, when setting the display mode of each pending image after the restricted state, it is possible to distinguish between pending information acquired during the restricted state and pending information that was not, and to process only the pending information acquired during the restricted state.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is restored by distinguishing between a case where a presentation mode with a high occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation (presentation mode A) is switched to a case where a presentation mode with a low occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation (presentation mode B) is switched to a case where a presentation mode with a low occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation is switched to a presentation mode with a high occurrence frequency. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 56 to 58. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched in a situation where a reserved image of a specific display mode exists, and the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and then the original presentation mode is switched back to, the display mode is restored to the reserved image. However, in this embodiment, even if the original presentation mode is not switched back to, the display mode is restored to the reserved image. Incidentally, the occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation in presentation mode A (the probability of the reserved notice presentation being executed when the pre-read result is incorrect) is higher than that in presentation mode B, in other words, the probability of a big win in presentation mode A for a specific display mode of the same display color is lower than that in presentation mode B, which is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The rendering mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 56. This process is executed in step S1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30) in the rendering control device 143, and is executed instead of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42. In Fig. 56, the same processes as those in Fig. 42 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

After executing the processing for switching the presentation mode in step S1903, in step S1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The presentation mode flag is used by the MPU 342 to grasp the presentation mode after switching before the presentation mode is switched, and the current presentation mode after the presentation mode is switched.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine whether a hold notice performance should be executed or is currently being executed.

If the hold notice flag is not stored, the process for switching presentation modes ends. On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, where the hold notice flag is erased. As a result, if a hold notice presentation was being executed before the mode was switched, the continuation of the hold notice presentation being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice presentation was in standby, the standby (execution reservation) of the hold notice presentation is canceled.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an pending image being displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb that is being displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. If there is no pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step S3104 and determine whether the current mode switch is a switch from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. In other words, determine whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a higher occurrence frequency of pending preview performance to a presentation mode with a lower occurrence frequency (in other words, whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a lower chance of winning the pending preview performance to a presentation mode with a higher occurrence frequency). If the switch is to presentation mode B, in step S3105, reference is made to the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344, and the change pattern of the pending image being displayed in a specific display mode is grasped.

In step S3106, a return determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 and the return determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The return determination is made to determine whether or not it is possible to return the pending image displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode again after the presentation mode is switched.

As shown in FIG. 57, the table for determining the return has an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 5H corresponding to a miss in SPSP Reach A, a return (change) to the green display mode HMc is permitted. When a hold notice performance is executed in a situation where the player is in performance mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to variation pattern 5H is set to the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the table for determining the return is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This is also true for other miss-corresponding variation patterns such as variation pattern 3H and variation pattern 4H. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, a change to the rainbow display mode HMe is permitted in all of variation patterns 1A to 5A. Note that the table for determining the return is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations, such as a different upper limit display mode for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In step S3106, the return determination table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified in step S3105, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target pending image is equal to or lower than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode, the return of the display mode is permitted, and if not, the return is not permitted.

In step S3107, it is determined whether the result of the return determination in step S3106 allows the return of the display mode. If return is not allowed, the process proceeds to step S3108, where processing is executed for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode in that specific display mode. In other words, the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa in conjunction with the switching of the presentation mode. In addition, in the cancellation processing in step S3108, processing is executed for erasing the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the presentation scenario data set in step S1513 of the setting processing for the reserved notice (FIG. 34). After execution of step S3108, the presentation mode switching processing is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3107 above (if the return of the display mode is permitted), in step S3109, the display mode information of each pending image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of RAM 344 is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. In step S3110, similar to step S3108 above, processing is executed for canceling the display of pending images displayed in a specific display mode in that specific display mode.

In step S3111, the setting process for the preview return is executed, and then the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated. The setting process for the preview return in step S3111 is similar to the setting process for the preview return in step S1913 (FIG. 43) of the processing for switching presentation modes (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment described above. In the setting process for the preview return, setting processes are performed such as the timing at which the display mode of the pending image is to be restored (changed) after switching to presentation mode B, and the method of restoration (whether to restore with a single change or to restore with gradual changes).

When the setting process for preview return is performed as described above, the display mode of the target preview is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the reserved preview in step S1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)) and in the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the reserved preview in step S1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41). At this time, in the second execution process of the reserved preview, processing is performed to return the display mode of the target preview to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before switching to performance mode B).

In addition, in the third execution process of the reserved notice, the current display mode of the target reserved image during the game round of the target reserved image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode to which the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image corresponds, and it is determined whether or not a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. Then, if such a change is possible, a promotion determination and a promotion lottery are carried out, and the display mode is promoted.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referenced is the one set for presentation mode B (conforming to the conditions of the hold notice presentation in presentation mode B). Therefore, even if the revertible display mode is limited to a lower upper limit display mode determined by the reversion determination table at the time of reversion of the display mode by switching to presentation mode B, the display mode of the target hold image can ultimately be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for presentation mode B.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3104 (switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A), the processing of steps S3105 to S3107 is skipped and the processing proceeds to step S3109. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a lower frequency of occurrence of hold notice presentations, to presentation mode A, which has a higher frequency, the display mode in presentation mode B is configured to be reflected as is in presentation mode A after the mode switch.

<Flow of display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The flow of display modes of the reserved image when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Here, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described. As already described, presentation mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the reserved notice presentation is relatively high, and presentation mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the reserved notice presentation is relatively low.

When the third reserved information (reserved image HW) of the first special chart occurs in a situation where the presentation mode is A, the main control device 162 executes a reserved read-ahead process (step S305) for the reserved information that has occurred. Here, it is assumed that the result of the read-ahead is that the win/loss judgment is a miss, and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B miss).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for the hold notice (step S1403) based on the results of the look-ahead in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold image HW, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the performance scenario, etc. As a result of these lotteries, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and a scenario is selected in which the display is initially in the blue display mode HMb and changes to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing as the performance scenario. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (a1), the hold image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the display mode of the pending image HW is the blue display mode HMb and the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the display mode of the pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2).

When switching to presentation mode B, the presentation control device 143 performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the on-hold image HW to a specific display mode (step S3106). In the return judgment, the fluctuation pattern of the on-hold image HW is identified, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is grasped based on the return judgment table (Figure 57), and it is determined whether or not the display mode of the on-hold image HW before switching to presentation mode B is equal to or lower than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of fluctuation pattern 4H, which is the fluctuation pattern of the pending image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and since the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to presentation mode B is the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to presentation mode B is a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set in the setting process for the preview return (step S3111).

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Then, the display position of the reserved image HW in the blue display mode HMb shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the presentation control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step S1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. In this case, the promotion determination is performed by applying the determination conditions of presentation mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to a lower blue display mode HMb than in presentation mode A, promotion of the reserved image HW is not permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. Also, if the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the green display mode HMc, as in presentation mode A, promotion is permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc at a predetermined reserved change point in the play round of the reserved image HW.

Next, we will explain what happens when the presentation mode is switched when the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in presentation mode A.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), a hold image HW in a blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the display position of the hold image HW shifts to the second unit hold display area Ga2 without switching the presentation mode, and as shown in FIG. 58 (b1), the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc.

In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the display mode of the pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2).

At this time, the performance control device 143 performs a return judgment, but the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to performance mode B becomes a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa for the period until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

Then, when the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D and a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the presentation control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variable pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, promotion to the blue display mode HMb is permitted, and if it is set to the green display mode HMc, promotion to the green display mode HMc is permitted. Note that FIG. 58 (b3) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the presentation mode is switched in a situation where the on-hold image is in a specific display mode (a situation where the on-hold notice presentation is being executed), the system is configured to determine whether or not the display mode of the target on-hold image HW in the presentation mode after the switch is to be the same as the display mode in the presentation mode before the switch.

In this embodiment, the mode is switched between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, allowing the player to change his/her mood during play and preventing boredom with the game. In this case, presentation mode B is set as a presentation mode in which the hold notice presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A. In this configuration, switching presentation modes changes the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the likelihood of a jackpot, so the difference between presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the change is limited to appearance, such as changing the background image or character image.

However, on the other hand, when the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met in a situation where the reserved image is in a specific display mode, if the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target reserved image HW is maintained, there is a concern that only the corresponding expectation level will change even though there is no change in the display mode. For example, even with the same specific display mode of green display mode HMc, the expectation level in presentation mode B is higher than that in presentation mode A. Therefore, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW remains in the green display mode HMc and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, if the player understands the expectation level of the green display mode HMc based on the expectation level in presentation mode B after the mode switch, there is a risk that the player will associate it with a higher expectation level than the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) that is actually performed in the game round.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the presentation mode is switched while the reserved image is in a specific display mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the target reserved image HW should be the same as the display mode in the presentation mode before the switch. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies in the expectation level from occurring, and makes it possible to appropriately display the reserved image after the transition to presentation mode B.

The display mode of the target pending image HW when switching to presentation mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set for presentation mode B, and based on the result, it is determined whether or not to make the display mode of the target pending image HW the same as the display mode before the mode switch.

In the above configuration, the display mode at the time of transition to presentation mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set for presentation mode B to determine whether or not to make the display mode the same as that in presentation mode A. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to make the display mode the same in presentation mode B based on the corresponding expectation level for each mode (blue display mode HMb, etc.), making it possible to appropriately display the pending image after transition to presentation mode B.

In the above case, multiple upper limit display modes in presentation mode B are set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and the above judgment is made by applying the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern predicted for the target reserved image HW. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to use the same mode based on the prediction result of the target reserved image HW, that is, the win/loss result actually notified in the play round of the target reserved image HW and the play round presentation (reach presentation, etc.) performed in that play round.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW in presentation mode B is to be the same as the display mode in presentation mode A before the mode change, the target hold image HW is first changed to the normal display mode HMa and then to the same mode.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is to be the same as before the mode change, it is possible to change it to the normal display mode HMa and then to the specific display mode. With this configuration, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be changed to the normal display mode HMa when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, whether the display mode is to be the same as before the mode change or not. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination that the display mode should not be the same. In addition, by changing to the normal display mode HMa and then to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the hold image set to the normal display mode HMa will be changed to the specific display mode after the transition to presentation mode B, including when it is determined that the display mode should not be the same, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the hold image (hold information).

When switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the above judgment is not performed, and the display mode of the target pending image in presentation mode A after the mode switch is the same as the display mode in presentation mode A before the mode switch.

In the above configuration, when the mode is switched from a high to a low expectation for the on-hold preview performance, no determination is made as to whether or not to keep the same mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the continuation of the on-hold preview performance (maintenance of the specific display mode of the on-hold image), and also makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the above-mentioned embodiments, the display mode of the reserved image before and after the performance mode switching is targeted, but in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode is targeted. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 59 to 67. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configuration as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the variable display time table for the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game state) and the variable display time table for the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state) are set separately from the variable display time table for the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal game state) (Figure 14).

In the variable display time table for the high probability game state, as shown in Figures 59(a) and (b), settings are made for a jackpot and a miss, respectively. In the variable display time table for a jackpot, a variable pattern 11A corresponding to an SPSP reach A hit and a variable pattern 12A corresponding to an SPSP reach B hit are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS.

In addition, in the variation display time table for misses, variation pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variation pattern 12H corresponding to an SPSP reach A miss, and variation pattern 13H corresponding to an SPSP reach B miss are set in accordance with the value of the variation type counter CS. When the value of the variation type counter CS is within the range of 0 to 79, in the normal game state, it corresponds to either a complete miss (variation pattern 1H) or a normal reach miss (variation pattern 2H) (Figure 14 (b)), but in the high probability game state, it corresponds only to a complete miss (variation pattern 11H) (Figure 59 (b)). In other words, even if the variation type counter CS has the same value, different game round presentations can be implemented in the normal game state and the high probability game state.

In the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, settings are made for a jackpot and a miss, as shown in Figures 59 (c) and (d). In the variable display time table for a jackpot, a variable pattern 21A corresponding to an SP reach A hit, a variable pattern 22A corresponding to an SP reach B hit, a variable pattern 23A corresponding to an SPSP reach A hit, and a variable pattern 24A corresponding to an SPSP reach B hit are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS.

In addition, in the variable display time table for misses, a variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, a variable pattern 22H corresponding to a SP reach A miss, a variable pattern 23H corresponding to a SP reach B miss, a variable pattern 24H corresponding to an SPSP reach A miss, and a variable pattern 25H corresponding to an SPSP reach B miss are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS. In the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, when comparing the same value of the variable type counter CS, different game number presentations can be implemented in the normal game state and the high probability game state. In the variable display time table for misses corresponding to the time-saving game state, the rate of complete misses is lower than in other game states, but this is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without a reach presentation by increasing the frequency of the reach presentation.

Note that the number of types of fluctuation patterns in each fluctuation display time table shown in FIG. 59 and the corresponding relationship with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are merely examples, and other configurations are also possible as long as they are set to different contents in the normal game state, the high probability game state, and the time-saving game state.

<Settings for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 60. This process is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step S1403 of the hold command response process (Fig. 31), and is executed instead of the setting process for the hold notice in Fig. 34. In Fig. 60, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 34, and their explanations are omitted or simplified.

First, in step S1501, the change pattern information etc. for the current reserved information is determined based on the reserved information stored in step S1401 of the reserved command response process (FIG. 31). In step S1502, it is determined whether the current reserved information corresponds to a jackpot based on the change pattern information etc. determined in step S1501.

If the information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the information is reserved for a miss, the process proceeds to step S3301, where it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the reserved information is fluctuation pattern 1H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in a normal game state), fluctuation pattern 11H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in a high probability game state), or fluctuation pattern 21H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in a time-saving game state). If a negative judgment is made in step S3301 (if the information is not fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 11H, or fluctuation pattern 21H) or if a positive judgment is made in step S1502 (if the information is reserved for a jackpot), the current game state is determined in step S3302. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability game state, or a time-saving game state.

In step S3303, the corresponding reserved notice execution lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. A plurality of reserved notice execution lottery tables are set corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot and the game state. For example, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a jackpot is set to have a higher winning probability than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where it is a miss. Also, in the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the high probability game state and the case where the current reserved information is a miss, the winning probability is set to be lower than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the normal game state or the time-saving game state and the case where the current reserved information is a miss, in order to suppress the occurrence of false effects in the high probability game state.

It is not necessary to vary the probability of the hold preview effect depending on the game state, and the probability of the hold preview effect being executed may be the same for the above three states or any two of those states.

In step S1506, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice performance based on the hold notice execution lottery table obtained in step S3303 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result. If the lottery result is an execution winning result, the process proceeds to step S1508, and the corresponding hold number is determined.

In step S3304, a final display mode selection table corresponding to the current game state is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In the final display mode selection table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. In this embodiment, since different variation patterns are set according to the game state, the final display mode selection table is also set separately to correspond to each game state.

Figure 61 shows a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss as examples of a final display mode lottery table in a high probability game state. Also, Figure 62 shows a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss as examples of a final display mode lottery table in a time-saving game state.

In step S1510, the final display mode for the current pending notice performance is selected based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S1501, the final display mode selection table obtained in step S3304, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step S1511, the performance scenario selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. In step S1512, the performance scenario for the current pending notice performance is selected based on the number of pending items determined in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the performance scenario selection table obtained in step S1511, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step S1513, the performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected in step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice is terminated. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a hold notice performance should be executed.

When the setting process for the hold notice is performed as described above, the display mode of the target hold image is changed based on the setting result of step S1513 in step S1404 of the hold command response process (Fig. 31), step S1701 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40), and the first execution process (Fig. 38) of the hold notice in step S1807 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41).

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S3301 (if the change pattern of the hold information is a complete miss change pattern), the process proceeds to step S1515, where the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the hold notice is terminated.

<Open/Close Execution Mode Processing>
The opening/closing execution mode process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 63. This process is executed in step S1306 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30).

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode is being executed. If the opening and closing execution mode is not being executed, in step S3402 it is determined whether an opening command (step S909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main control device 162, i.e., whether it is time to start the opening and closing execution mode. If an opening command has not been received, the opening and closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If an opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3403, where opening processing is executed. In the opening processing, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening performance is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, etc.

In step S3404, it is determined whether the number of reserved items (total number of reserved items 1 and 2) is 0, i.e., whether any reserved items exist. If the number of reserved items is 0 (no reserved items exist), the process for the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If the number of reserved items is not 0 and there are reserved items, the process proceeds to step S3405, where it is determined whether or not a reserved notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a reserved notice flag is stored, the reserved notice flag is erased in step S3406. As a result, if a reserved notice performance was being executed before the opening/closing execution mode was started, the continuation of the reserved notice performance being executed is canceled, and if the reserved notice performance was in a standby state, the standby (execution reservation) of the reserved notice performance is canceled.

In step S3407, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an pending image displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb that is displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344.

If there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S3408, and information indicating in which mode the pending image is displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. In the following step S3409, information indicating the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is stored in RAM 344. For example, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state, information corresponding to the normal game state is stored in a specified area of RAM 344. Note that this information is stored in a separate memory area from the state flag indicating the current game state in order to distinguish it from the flag.

In step S3410, a standby flag for return is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The standby flag for return is used by the MPU 342 to recognize that the MPU 342 is waiting for a return process to return the display mode of the reserved image to the original specific display mode. In the following step S3411, a process is executed to erase the reserved image from the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. That is, in this embodiment, the reserved image displayed on the reserved display unit 200 is configured to be erased when the open/close execution mode is started. After execution of step S3411, the process for the open/close execution mode is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3405 (if the hold notice flag is not stored) or if a negative judgment is made in step S3407 (if a hold image of a specific display mode does not exist), the process proceeds to step S3411, and the hold image deletion process is executed. In other words, even if the hold notice performance is not being executed, the hold image in the hold display unit 200 is deleted when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3401 above (if the game is in the opening and closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step S3412, where it is judged whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance. If the predetermined period of time has not elapsed, processing for the opening and closing execution mode is executed in step S3413, and then the processing for the opening and closing execution mode is terminated. In the processing for the opening and closing execution mode, a transmission command is set to the display control device 350 so that a predetermined round performance, a winning performance, an ending performance, etc. is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, etc.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3412 (if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance), the process proceeds to step S3414, where it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If a return standby flag is not stored, the process for the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3415, where a process is executed to clear the return standby flag. Here, a situation in which a positive determination is made in step S3414 means that the open/close execution mode is performed while the on-hold notice performance is being executed, and the display of the on-hold image is erased. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3416, where a setting process for the on-hold image return notice is executed to return the display mode of the on-hold image to a specific display mode. Details of this process will be described later.

After step S3416 is executed, settings are made in step S3417 to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa. That is, when returning the display mode of the pending image to the specific display mode, immediately after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the display is resumed with the pending image in the normal display mode HMa. After step S3417 is executed, the processing for the opening and closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3414 above (if the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S3418, where it is judged whether the number of reserved items (total number of special 1 reserved items and special 2 reserved items) is 0. If the number of reserved items is 0 and there are no reserved items, the process for the open/close execution mode ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved items is not 0 and there are reserved items, the reserved images for those reserved items are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in step S3417.

<Settings for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3501, the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made based on the information stored in step S3409 (Figure 63). In step S3502, the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made based on the reserved information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step S3503, a return judgment of the display mode is made based on the game state before the opening and closing execution mode grasped in step S3501, the jackpot type grasped in step S3502, and the return judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The return judgment is to determine whether or not the reserved image that was set to a specific display mode in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode should be returned to its original display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return judgment table, whether or not to allow the return of the display mode is determined in accordance with the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, when the game state is common before and after the opening and closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a high-probability game state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, the return of the display mode is restricted when the game state is different before and after the opening and closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a high-probability game state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the jackpot type is a time-saving game state.

However, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode was a normal game state and the jackpot type was a guaranteed jackpot, the system refers to the results of the pre-reading of the target reserved image to determine whether or not to allow a return. Specifically, if the results of the pre-reading of the target reserved image are a result other than a normal jackpot, the system restricts the return of the above display mode, whereas if the results of the pre-reading of the target reserved image are a normal jackpot, the system allows the return of the above display mode. This is to prevent the high probability game state from ending before the player is able to fully enjoy playing in the high probability game state.

In other words, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is a probability jackpot, the game mode will switch from the first special symbol game (left-hand play state) to the second special symbol game (right-hand play state) via the opening and closing execution mode. At that time, if a normal jackpot is present in the reserve of the first special symbol and the reserve is consumed, the state will end early even though it was possible to transition to a high probability game state. Therefore, if there is such a risk, the display mode of the reserved image of the first special symbol is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player and encourage quick entry into the second operation port 63 (starting port for the second special symbol).

In this embodiment, the system is configured to restrict the return of the display mode when the result of the preview of the target reserved image is a guaranteed jackpot, but this may also be permitted.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the preview return (FIG. 64), after execution of step S3503, in step S3504, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment process of step S3503 permitted the return of the display mode. If the result did not permit the return, the setting process for the preview return is terminated. In other words, the display mode of the target pending image after the opening and closing execution mode is left as the normal display mode HMa.

If return is permitted, in step S3505, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to ascertain the display state of the target pending image before the open/close execution mode. After step S3505 is executed, the processes of steps S3506 to S3510 are executed.

These processes are similar to steps S2103 to S2107 in FIG. 43, and set the timing at which the display mode of the target reserved image is to be restored to the original display mode, corresponding to the number of reserved images before the target reserved image. That is, in step S3506, the number of reserved images before the target reserved image is determined, and if the determined number of reserved images is 1 or more, in step S3508, a return scenario for changing the display mode determined in step S3505 is drawn by lottery. In step S3509, the return scenario data is set so that the drawn return scenario is executed, and in step S3510, a notice return flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that processing should be executed to restore the display mode of the reserved image to the original.

When the setting process for the preview return is performed as described above, the display mode of the target preview is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the reserved preview in step S1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)) and in the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the reserved preview in step S1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41). At this time, the second execution process of the reserved preview executes processing to return the display mode of the target preview to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the reserved notice, the current display mode of the target reserved image during the game round of the target reserved image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode to which the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image corresponds, and it is determined whether or not a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. Then, if such a change is possible, a promotion determination and a promotion lottery are carried out, and the display mode is promoted.

<Display mode of pending images before and after the opening and closing execution mode>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode will be explained. Here, the case where the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and a normal jackpot occurs, and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and the case where the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and a probability variable jackpot occurs, and the game state transitions to the probability variable game state after the opening and closing execution mode will be explained as examples.

First, with reference to Figure 66, we will explain the case where a normal jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the time-saving game state, and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the third reserved information of the second special chart occurs in the time-saving game state, the main control unit 162 performs a reserved pre-reading process (step S305), and the performance control unit 143 performs a setting process for the reserved notice (step S1403). As a result, when a reserved notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 66(a), a reserved image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Gb3 of the second reserved display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot result occurs in the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased, as shown in FIG. 66(b). This state is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for preview return (step S3416) and performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In the return judgment, the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and it is judged whether or not the two match. If a normal jackpot result occurs in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes a time-saving game state, and therefore the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode match. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a lottery for a return scenario is performed.

As a result, if a scenario is drawn to return to the green display mode HMc at the second shift timing after the opening and closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 66(c), when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display of each pending image HW will resume with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa.

After that, at the first shift timing from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 66(d). Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit hold display area Gb2 to the first unit hold display area Gb1, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, with reference to Figure 67, we will explain the case where a special jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-limited game state, and the game state transitions to a special jackpot state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the third reserved information of the second special chart occurs in the time-saving game state, the main control unit 162 performs a reserved pre-reading process (step S305), and the performance control unit 143 performs a setting process for the reserved notice (step S1403). As a result, when a reserved notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 67(a), a reserved image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Gb3 of the second reserved display area Gb.

When a guaranteed jackpot result occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased, as shown in FIG. 67(b).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for advance notice return (step S3416) to make a return judgment. If a guaranteed jackpot result occurs during the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes a highly probable game state, and the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode do not match. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, and the return process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display of each pending image is resumed with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa for the period until the pending image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. In other words, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the pending notice performance performed before the opening and closing execution mode is basically canceled, and the pending notice performance for the same pending image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step S1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, as shown in FIG. 67(e). Note that FIG. 67(e) shows the case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, we will explain the case where a special jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state, and the game state transitions to a high probability game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

In this case, since the game state before the opening and closing execution mode does not match the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, if we apply the above example, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening and closing execution mode. However, when switching from a low probability game state (left-hand play) aiming for a win in the first operating port 62 to a high probability game state (right-hand play) aiming for a win in the second operating port 63, whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the results of the advance reading of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW.

Specifically, if the result of the pre-read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reserved image HW is restored after the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, if there is reserved information that results in a normal jackpot result in the first special chart, when a play round of that reserved information is executed, the state that could have been transitioned to a high probability play state will end prematurely, so the display mode is changed to a specific display mode to encourage winning into the second operating port 63.

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the reserved image HW may be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. By using a display mode different from the case where the display mode is restored when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode matches the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is expected that the player's awareness will be promoted. In addition, by displaying in the specific display mode from the beginning, there is also the advantage that the player can quickly realize that there is reserved information on the first special chart that will result in a normal jackpot, making it easier for him or her to respond.

On the other hand, if the result of the pre-read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a result other than a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening and closing execution mode, as a general rule.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When switching to the open/close execution mode in a situation where the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a reserved notice performance is being executed), if the game state before the open/close execution mode differs from the game state after the open/close execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the open/close execution mode is configured to be different from the display mode before the open/close execution mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the reserved read-ahead process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple game states. In this manner, in a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether or not a win has been won is the same, differences may occur in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) performed in the game round depending on the game state.

In this regard, in this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that was in a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode was executed, if the game state before and after the opening and closing execution mode is different, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is made different from the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, even if the award determination result or game number presentation due to differences in the game state changes, the target reserved image HW is prevented from misleading the player, and it is possible to preferably display the reserved image in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the open/close execution mode is entered in a situation where the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a reserved notice performance is being executed), the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the open/close execution mode is configured to differ depending on whether the game state before the open/close execution mode is the same as the game state after the open/close execution mode or not.

As mentioned above, in a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether or not a win has been won is the same, differences may occur in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as reach presentation) performed in a game round depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that was in a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is made different depending on whether the game state before and after the opening/closing execution mode is the same. This makes it possible to set the display mode based on the win/lose determination result and the change in game round presentation due to differences in the game state, and makes it possible to appropriately display the reserved image in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

If the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

The above configuration effectively prevents the display of a pending image that does not match the actual expectation level after the opening and closing execution mode, which can lead to misunderstandings by the player. In addition, by uniformly using the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the display mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is then determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target reserved image HW is changed based on the result of the determination.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to absorb the results of the win/lose judgment and the fluctuations in the game round presentation caused by the change in the game state, but there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or indicate the expectation level of the reserved information corresponding to the target reserved image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, the target reserved image HW that has been set to the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to a specific display mode afterwards, so that even if the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

In the above case, when play has progressed to the play count of the target reserved image HW set to the normal display mode HMa, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

By promoting the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the game round of the target reserved image HW has started, a promotion determination can be made by utilizing the information on the win/lose determination acquired and transmitted at the start of the game round and the information on the game round presentation. Since this information corresponds to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the above promotion can be made in a manner appropriate to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to change the display mode of the target reserved image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa after the opening and closing execution mode, to a specific display mode without giving the player any misunderstanding regarding the level of expectation, etc.

In particular, by determining whether or not the target reserved image HW is promoted to a specific display mode based on the variation pattern identified by the execution of a win/lose judgment in the main control device 162 (start of a game round), it is possible to determine whether or not promotion is possible using the same information that is used to select the game round presentation in the game round of the target reserved image HW. As a result, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be changed to the specific display mode while adapting it to the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting a change pattern (the result of the win/lose judgment and information on the game round performance) corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode solely for the purpose of judging whether or not to promote the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a game round of the target reserved image HW is executed in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to send a change start command from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143 in order to execute the change display of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the special pattern game round in the special pattern display unit 43. However, by adopting a configuration in which the promotion judgment is executed using this change start command, it becomes unnecessary to notify the main control device 162 of the change pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the performance control device 143 by a dedicated command other than the change start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received, which prevents the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the reserved image when a reserved notice performance is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process performed before the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that it will be set to a display mode different from the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In this regard, with this configuration, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed in a situation where a reserved image with a specific display mode exists, information on the display mode at that time is stored, and the report display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the stored information, so that it is possible to preferably restore the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode to the original mode before the opening and closing execution mode.

By restoring the target pending image HW (pending information) to its original state before the opening and closing execution mode in this way, the target pending image HW (pending information) that aroused a sense of anticipation in the player by changing to a specific display state before the opening and closing execution mode can arouse the same sense of anticipation even after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is to be the same as the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to first set it to the normal display mode HMa and then change it to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa as the opening and closing execution mode is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal display mode HMa due to a difference in the game state. In addition, by causing an event in which the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the reserved image that has been set to the normal display mode HMa will be changed to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, including cases in which the game state is different, and it becomes possible to maintain anticipation for the reserved image (reserved information).

A determination of whether the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is made at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

In this case, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be adjusted quickly after the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, even if there are fewer pending items before the target pending image HW after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be appropriately adjusted.

The pending image is now hidden while the open/close execution mode is running.

When changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW upon the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the target reserved image HW that had been displayed up until that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player will have an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is expected that it will be easily noticeable to the player and will easily give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the reserved image is not displayed in the opening and closing execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW, a period can be inserted during which the reserved image itself, including other reserved images, is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the display mode from being noticeable and to alleviate unnaturalness. In addition, by making the reserved image not displayed, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

Fifth embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode for the reserved image that was set to a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is determined according to the relationship between the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed again after the opening and closing execution mode for the reserved image that was set to a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image is determined based on the result. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 76. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 is explained below.

<Information Acquisition Process>
The information acquisition process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 68(a). This process is executed when a prize is won at the actuation ports 62, 63 (executed in step S205 of the prize winning process for the actuation ports (Fig. 17)), and is executed in place of the information acquisition process of Fig. 18. In Fig. 68(a), the same steps as those in Fig. 18 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

In step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the corresponding reserved areas for the special chart display section, and then the reserved command setting process is executed in step S4101. After execution of step S4101, the information acquisition process is terminated. Here, the reserved command setting process in step S4101 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 68(b).

First, in step S4201, the start reserved memory numbers RaN, RbN stored in each reserved area Ra, Rb of the reserved ball storage area 314b and the common reserved number CRN stored in the total reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 314b are read, and the information is stored in the register of the MPU 312. In steps S4202 to S4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random number for winning or losing), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (random number for drawing the jackpot type), and the value of the variation type counter CS (random number for drawing the variation pattern) contained in the reserved information acquired in step S304 (Fig. 68(a)) based on the current winning of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 are grasped. Note that the processing in steps S4201 to S4204 is the same as the processing in steps S1202, S1205, and S1208 of the reserved pre-read processing (Fig. 28) according to the first embodiment described above.

In the next step S4205, a hold command is set as an output target to the performance control device 143, and then the hold command setting process is terminated. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special chart or the second special chart, as well as information indicating the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS determined in steps S4202 to S4204 above.

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, the hold-ahead read process (FIG. 28) performs a win/lose determination process and a lottery process for the variation pattern based on the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped, and the results are included in the hold command and sent to the performance control device 143. However, in this embodiment, instead of the results of the win/lose determination process and the lottery process for the variation pattern, the information on the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped (random number information used in the win/lose determination process and the lottery process for the variation pattern) is included in the hold command and sent to the performance control device 143.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 is explained below.

<Pending command processing>
The hold command response process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 69. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step S1302 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30)), and is executed in place of the hold command response process in Fig. 31. In Fig. 69, the same processes as those in Fig. 31 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S4301, where the first hold pre-read process is executed. The first hold pre-read process is a hold pre-read process performed by the performance control device 143, and based on the information of the various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the hold command from the main control device 162, it pre-reads the results of the win/lose judgment for the hold information acquired upon the occurrence of a start win. Here, the first hold pre-read process in step S4301 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 70.

First, in step S4401, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability game state, or a time-limited game state. In step S4402, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the current hold information is determined. In step S4403, a win/loss determination table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343.

In this embodiment, the same table data as the hit/miss determination table stored in the ROM 313 (hit/miss table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored as the hit/miss determination table for the performance control device 143. The same table data as the hit type table (FIG. 13) and the variable display time table (FIGS. 14 and 59) stored in the ROM 313 of the main control device 162 are also stored for the jackpot type table for drawing the hit type and the variable display time table for drawing the variable pattern. For this reason, even if the performance control device 143 performs the lottery process separately from the hit/miss lottery and the variable pattern lottery in the main control device 162, the same lottery result can be obtained as long as the random number values used in the lottery are the same.

The win/loss determination table is set up separately for low probability mode (normal game state, time-saving game state) and high probability mode (high probability game state), so in step S4403, the table corresponding to the game state identified in step S4401 is obtained.

In step S4404, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, a win/loss determination is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step S4402 and the win/loss determination table obtained in step S4403, and the win/loss result is determined. In step S4405, it is determined whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S4404 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step S4406, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the current hold information is determined.

In step S4407, as a pre-reading process for the jackpot type, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determined in step S4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and the result of the type lottery is determined. At this time, if the reserved information is based on winning the first operating port 62, the type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if the reserved information is based on winning the second operating port 63, the type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

In step S4408, the jackpot information indicating the jackpot result determined in step S4404 and the type information indicating the jackpot type result determined in step S4407 are stored. These pieces of information are stored in the corresponding areas in the reserved memory area 344c (Figure 32) of RAM 344.

In this embodiment, since the results of the pre-reading of the jackpot type are not reflected in the pending preview performance, the processing of steps S4406 and S4407 may be omitted.

After execution of step S4408 or if a negative judgment is made in step S4405 (if the jackpot has not been won), in step S4409, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed and the value of the variable type counter CS in the current hold information is determined. In step S4410, based on the game state determined in step S4401 and the result of the win/lose lottery determined in step S4404, a corresponding variable display time table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. For example, if the current game state is a time-saving game state and the result determined in step S4404 is a loss result, a loss variable display time table for the time-saving game state (Figure 59 (d)) is obtained.

In step S4411, as a process of reading ahead the fluctuation pattern, a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step S4409 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S4410, and the result is grasped. In step S4412, information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the reserved memory area 344c. After execution of step S4412, the first reserved read-ahead process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command response process (FIG. 69), after the first hold pre-read process is executed in step S4301, the hold notice setting process is executed in step S1403 using the processing result of step S4301. The hold notice setting process is a setting process for executing the hold notice performance.

<Open/Close Execution Mode Processing>
The opening and closing execution mode process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 71. This process is executed in step S1306 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the opening and closing execution mode process of Fig. 63. In Fig. 71, the same steps as those in Fig. 63 are given the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

After the hold notice flag is cleared in step S3406, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is an hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb at the start timing of the opening and closing execution mode that is displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe.

If there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S3408, and information indicating in which display mode the pending image is displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. After step S3408 is executed, the process of step S3409 (FIG. 63) is not executed, and a return standby flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344 in step S3410. That is, in the fifth embodiment described above, the process of storing the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S3409, but in this embodiment, this process is not executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3414 (if it is judged that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344), the process of clearing the return standby flag is executed in step S3415.

Here, a situation in which a positive judgment is made in step S3414 means that the open/close execution mode is performed while the on-hold preview performance is being executed, and the display of the on-hold image is erased. In this case, in step S4501, a second on-hold read-ahead process is executed to perform a new on-hold read-ahead. In the following step S4502, a setting process for the on-hold return is executed to return the display mode of the on-hold image to a specific display mode. Details of the second on-hold read-ahead process in step S4501 and the setting process for the on-hold return in step S4502 will be described later.

After step S4502 is executed, in step S3417, a process is executed to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa, and then the process for the open/close execution mode is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment as well, the pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the open/close execution mode is terminated.

<Second reserved read-ahead processing>
The second reserved read-ahead processing in step S4501 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S4601, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made by referring to the type of jackpot for the current jackpot that triggered the opening and closing execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a guaranteed jackpot state, and if it is a normal jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a time-saving game state.

In step S4602, the reserved memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c is determined. This process may be performed on all reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c, or on only the reserved information that is the target of the return process (the reserved information of the reserved image that was displayed in a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

In step S4603, a hit/lose determination table corresponding to the game state grasped in step S4601 is obtained. In step S4604, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, a hit/lose lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S4602 and the hit/lose determination table obtained in step S4603, and the hit/lose result is determined. Note that the process of step S4604 is performed on the reserved information for which the jackpot random number counter C1 was grasped in step S4602. The same applies to the processes from step S4605 onwards.

Here, the processing of steps S4603 and S4604 is the same as step S4403 and step S4404 of the first reserved read-ahead processing (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (when reserved information is acquired). However, if the lottery mode changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability game state, the winning/losing judgment table acquired in step S4603 is different, so a lottery result different from the first reserved read-ahead processing may be obtained. For example, if a certain jackpot result is won under normal game state and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the reserved reserved information is "17", the first reserved read-ahead processing before the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the certain jackpot result is performed will read a losing result, but the second reserved read-ahead processing assuming the game state after the opening and closing execution mode will read a winning result (FIG. 12).

In step S4605, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step S4604 is a jackpot win or not. If it is a jackpot win, in step S4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined by referring to the reserved memory area 344c. In step S4607, as a jackpot type pre-reading process, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determined in step S4606 and the type table stored in the various table memory area 343a of the ROM 343, and the result of the type lottery is determined.

In step S4608, the jackpot information indicating the jackpot result determined in step S4604 and the type information indicating the jackpot type result determined in step S4607 are stored in the corresponding memory areas of the reserved memory area 344c.

In step S4609, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined by referring to the reserved memory area 344c. In step S4610, based on the game state determined in step S4601 and the result of the win/lose lottery determined in step S4604, the corresponding variation display time table is obtained from the various table memory area 343a of the ROM 343. For example, if the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability game state and the result determined in step S4604 is a loss result, the loss variation display time table for the high probability game state (Figure 59 (b)) is obtained.

In step S4611, as a process of reading ahead the fluctuation pattern, a lottery process of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step S4609 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S4610, and the result is grasped. The process of step S4611 is similar to step S4411 of the first reserved pre-reading process performed at the time of start winning (when the reserved information is acquired), but if the game state changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S4610 will be different, and a lottery result different from the first reserved pre-reading process may be obtained.

In step S4612, information indicating the fluctuation pattern identified in step S4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the reserved memory area 344c, and then the second reserved read-ahead process is terminated.

<Settings for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step S4502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S4701, the hold memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced to determine the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image (the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode). The change pattern determined in this case is the change pattern determined in the second hold pre-read process.

In step S4702, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 is any of fluctuation patterns 1H, 11H, and 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to complete misses (FIGS. 14 and 59), and if it is any of them, the setting process for the advance return is terminated.

If the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 is not fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 11H, or fluctuation pattern 21H, the process proceeds to step S4703, where the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 (the fluctuation pattern read ahead in the second reserved read ahead process) is grasped. An upper limit display mode table is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. As shown in FIG. 74, the upper limit display mode table defines an upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. For example, in fluctuation pattern 12H corresponding to a miss in SPSP reach A in a high probability gaming state, a red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step S4703, the upper limit display mode table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the gaming state after the open/close execution mode.

In step S4704, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the display mode of the target reserved image before the opening and closing execution mode. In step S4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not the display mode of the target reserved image should be returned to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode in play after the opening and closing execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode determined in step S4703 is compared with the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode determined in step S4704, and if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is of the same rank or lower rank than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that return is permitted, and if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is of a higher rank than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that return is not permitted.

In step S4706, it is determined whether the result of the return judgment in step S4705 is to allow return. If the judgment result is that return is not allowed, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated.

If the determination result is that return is permitted, the processes of steps S4707 to S4711 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S2103 to S2107 in FIG. 43, and set the timing at which the display mode of the target pending image is to be returned to the original display mode, corresponding to the number of pending images before the target pending image. That is, in step S4707, the number of pending images before the target pending image is determined, and if the determined number of pending images is 1 or more, a lottery process for a return scenario is executed in step S4709. In step S4710, the return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed.

In addition, since the second reserved read-ahead process (step S4501) is executed at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, it is also possible to start displaying the reserved image in a specific display mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, but in this embodiment, the display mode is uniformly set to the normal display mode HMa immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends (step S3417). In other words, even if the target reserved image is set to a specific display mode after the opening and closing execution mode, it is displayed in the normal display mode HMa once and then changed to the specific display mode afterwards. This configuration is based on the fact that there is a high possibility that the payout of game balls is continuing at the timing immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and the player may be responding by discharging game balls from the lower tray 34, etc., and in such cases, it is assumed that attention to the reserved image will decrease. By avoiding the display of the specific display mode at such a timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display mode from being set without the player's knowledge.

After execution of step S4710, in step S4711, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that processing should be performed to return the display mode of the pending image to the original state.

After step S4711 is executed, the setting process for the notice return is terminated. Then, as shown in FIG. 71, in step S3417, the hold images, including the target hold image, are set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for all holds that exist at the time of the end of the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, even if the return process is performed, the target hold image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, in the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step S1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)), or in the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the hold notice in step S1808 of the special chart change display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, processing is performed to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the reserved notice, the current display mode of the target reserved image during the game round of the target reserved image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode to which the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image corresponds, and it is determined whether or not a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. Then, if such a change is possible, a promotion determination and a promotion lottery are carried out, and the display mode is promoted.

<Flow of display of pending images before and after the opening and closing execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode will be described. First, the case where the result of the prediction of the winning/losing judgment does not change before and after the opening and closing execution mode, but the result of the prediction of the variation pattern changes will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when the third reserved information (reserved image HW) of the second special chart occurs in a highly probable game state, the main control device 162 executes the information acquisition process (FIG. 68(a)). As a result, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is assumed to be 25, and the value of the variation type counter CS is assumed to be 80.

The performance control device 143 also executes a first reserved read-ahead process (step S4301) based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using the game state at that time, i.e., the hit/miss determination table and the variable display time table for the high probability game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 12H (Figure 59 (b)), the result of the first reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 12H. Fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a miss in SPSP reach A.

Furthermore, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for the hold notice (step S1403) based on the result of the first hold pre-read process, and performs a lottery to execute the hold notice performance for the hold image HW, a lottery to select the final display mode, a lottery to select the performance scenario, etc. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (Figure 61 (b)), and here, as a result of the above various lotteries, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and a performance scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot result occurs in the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased, as in the fifth embodiment above. This state is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes the second reserved read-ahead process (step S4501) based on the reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c. In the case of a normal jackpot result, the game state after the open/close execution mode becomes a time-saving game state, but in the second reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using a hit/miss judgment table and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 23H (Figure 59 (d)), the result of the second reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 23H. The fluctuation pattern 23H is not a SPSP reach A miss, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SP reach B miss, which is lower than the reach performance.

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process (step S4502) for preview return based on the result of the second hold look-ahead process, and performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In the return judgment, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read in advance by the second hold look-ahead process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (Figure 74), and it is judged whether or not the display mode of the hold image HW before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of fluctuation pattern 23H read ahead by the second reserved read-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (Figure 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even if the display mode of the pending image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-reading process, so after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

In contrast to these, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-read process. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. In other words, whether or not the specific display mode is returned depends on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening and closing execution mode is started.

If a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D after the open/close execution mode ends (Figure 75 (c)).

Then, when the display position of the reserved image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step S1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variable pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted within the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 76 what happens when the results of the look-ahead judgment of the win/loss determination change before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the third reserved information (reserved image HW) of the second special chart occurs in a highly probable game state, the main control device 162 executes an information acquisition process. As a result, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is assumed to be 17, and the value of the variation type counter CS is assumed to be 45.

The performance control device 143 also executes the first reserved read-ahead process based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. The win/loss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 in the high probability game state is a win result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 12A (Figure 59 (a)), so the result of the first reserved read-ahead process is a win and fluctuation pattern 12A. Fluctuation pattern 12A is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach B win.

Furthermore, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for the hold notice based on the result of the first hold pre-read process. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow display mode HMe (Figure 61 (a)). Here, as a result of the above-mentioned various lotteries, the rainbow display mode HMe is drawn as the final display mode, and a performance scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is drawn. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a second reserved read-ahead process based on the reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c. In the second reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using a hit/miss determination table and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 22H (Figure 59 (d)), the result of the second reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 22H. Fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach hit, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss (SP reach A miss).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for preview return based on the results of the second hold look-ahead process, and performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 22H read in advance by the second hold look-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (Figure 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even if the display mode of the pending image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-reading process, so after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

In contrast to these, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow display mode HMe when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-reading process. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. In other words, even if the win/loss changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, whether or not the specific display mode is returned to will depend on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening and closing execution mode is started.

If a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D after the open/close execution mode ends (Figure 76 (c)).

Then, the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Depending on the value of the variation type counter CS of the reserved image HW, even if the result of the first reserved pre-reading process in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a hit and a variation pattern of a reach effect or more, the result of the second reserved pre-reading process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode may change to a miss and a variation pattern corresponding to a complete miss (for example, in the case where a normal jackpot result is obtained in the high probability game state as described above and a transition is made to a time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved information of the reserved image HW is 17 and the value of the variation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode restoration process is not performed in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the open/close execution mode is entered in a situation where the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where the reserved notice performance is being executed), the reserved read-ahead process (second reserved read-ahead process) is executed again after the open/close execution mode, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set based on the result.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the reserved read-ahead process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple game states. In this manner, in a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether or not a win has been won is the same, differences may occur in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) performed in the game round depending on the game state.

In this regard, in this configuration, if the system transitions to the opening and closing execution mode while a hold notice performance is being performed, the system executes the pre-reading process again after the opening and closing execution mode for the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance, and sets the display mode of the target hold image HW (the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance) based on the result. Therefore, for the target hold image HW for which a hold notice performance was being performed before the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode can be adjusted to be suitable for the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, making it possible to suitably display the hold image after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the reserved ball pre-reading process is performed again after the opening and closing execution mode, the pre-reading is performed by applying the win/lose judgment conditions and the performance selection conditions that correspond to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to adjust the display mode of the target reserved ball image HW while aligning it with the win/lose result that is actually notified in the game round of the target reserved ball image HW that is performed after the opening and closing execution mode and the game round performance that is actually performed in that game round.

The display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result of the reserved pre-read process after the opening and closing execution mode and the display mode of the target reserved image HW before the opening and closing execution mode.

For example, if the display mode of the reserved image changes frequently when switching to the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable. In this regard, with this configuration, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set taking into account not only the results of the second look-ahead, but also the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. For example, if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the results of the second look-ahead, and there is no problem in using the same display mode after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode can be carried over. This makes it possible to prevent excessive changes in the display mode of the reserved image at the border of the opening and closing execution mode, and makes it possible to display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode in a natural manner.

Multiple upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each game state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second look-ahead process after the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result. More specifically, if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the same mode as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, multiple types of display modes (notification modes in the hold preview performance) for the reserved image are set with different jackpot expectations. In this configuration in which the expectation level is set in stages and multiple display modes are provided, the range of expectation levels corresponding to one display mode is narrow, so if the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode is displayed in the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, there is a tendency for the expected levels suggested before and after the opening and closing execution mode to differ. In this regard, with this configuration, even in a situation in which multiple display modes are set, it is possible to align the expected levels and appropriately display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode.

If the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is a higher display mode than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to prevent the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode from exceeding the expected degree corresponding to the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, and makes it possible to preferably display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a specific display mode during the game of the target reserved image HW, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to absorb the results of the win/lose judgment and the fluctuations in the game round presentation caused by the change in the game state, but there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or indicate the expectation level of the reserved information corresponding to the target reserved image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that has been set to the normal display mode HMa, an opportunity to change to a specific display mode is given as the game progresses to the game round of the target reserved image HW. Therefore, even if the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

In the above case, the determination as to whether or not the target reserved image HW is promoted to a specific display mode is made based on the variation pattern identified by the execution of a win/loss determination in the main control device 162 (the start of a game round).

In this case, the same information used to select the game round presentation in the game round of the target reserved image HW is used to determine whether or not promotion will occur, so if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting it to the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting a change pattern (the result of the win/lose judgment and information on the game round performance) corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode solely for the purpose of judging whether or not to promote the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a game round of the target reserved image HW is executed in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to send a change start command from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143 in order to execute the change display of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the special pattern game round in the special pattern display unit 43. However, by adopting a configuration in which the promotion judgment is executed using this change start command, it becomes unnecessary to notify the main control device 162 of the change pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the performance control device 143 by a dedicated command other than the change start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received, which prevents the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is to be the same as the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to first set it to the normal display mode HMa and then change it to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored to the same mode or not, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa as the opening and closing execution mode is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination not to restore to the same mode. In addition, by causing an event in which the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the reserved image that has been set to the normal display mode HMa may be changed to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, including when it is determined not to restore to the same mode, and it becomes possible to maintain anticipation for the reserved image (reserved information).

The pending image is now hidden while the open/close execution mode is running.

When changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW upon the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the target reserved image HW that had been displayed up until that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player will have an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is expected that it will be easily noticeable to the player and will easily give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the reserved image is not displayed in the opening and closing execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW, a period can be inserted during which the reserved image itself, including other reserved images, is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the display mode from being noticeable and to alleviate unnaturalness. In addition, by making the reserved image not displayed, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image before the occurrence of the power interruption state and the display mode of the reserved image when the power is restored from the power interruption state are targeted. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 77 to 86. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the occurrence of a power outage is detected by the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191, a power outage flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage) is set in the backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and power for power outage is supplied from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314. In other words, when a power outage occurs, power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the play times of the special and normal figures on the main display unit 81 that were in progress when the power outage occurred, and the reserved information stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 when the power outage occurred, etc. can be retained, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In this embodiment, in addition, the data stored in the RAM 344 in the performance control device 143 is also backed up.

However, because the performance control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 installed in the performance control device 143 is larger in capacity than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. For this reason, if an attempt was made to back up all of the data stored in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143 as is, the amount of power consumed during a power outage would be large. As a result, there is a concern that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 will be consumed in a short period of time, shortening the data retention period (backup period) or requiring a backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage capacity, resulting in increased costs.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire data stored in RAM 344 is not backed up, but rather, as a part of it, information related to reserved images such as reserved information stored in reserved memory area 344c is backed up. The electrical configuration for this purpose will be explained with reference to FIG. 77.

The performance control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium dedicated to backup, separate from the RAM 344. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and is sufficient to store information related to images for reservation. Note that the backup RAM 345 may be integrated into a single chip together with the MPU 342, like the RAM 344, or may be integrated into a chip separate from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344.

RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 are supplied with power during power outage from backup power supply unit 316. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, information relating to the reserved images among the data stored in RAM 344 is stored (copied) to backup RAM 345, and the supply of power during power outage to RAM 344 is intended to supply the power required to read out the information relating to the reserved images stored in RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (writing process to backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power during power outage to RAM 344 is stopped.

On the other hand, the supply of power during power interruption to the backup RAM 345 continues even after the writing process of the information related to the reserved image is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power during power interruption is supplied to that storage medium, so that the amount of power consumed to retain data can be kept low. This prevents the data retention period from becoming shorter and the need for a backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage capacity from becoming necessary.

Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control device 191 or the performance control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) that switches the state of the power supply to the RAM 344 during power interruption. The switching unit operates to supply power during power interruption from the backup power supply unit 316 to the RAM 344 at least while information about the reserved image is being read from the RAM 344 and written to the backup RAM 345, and to stop the supply of power during power interruption to the RAM 344 after writing of information about the reserved image to the backup RAM 345 is completed.

The performance control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal, just like the main control device 162, and a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 in the power supply and launch control device 191 is output to the NMI terminal. In other words, in this embodiment, when a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315, power outage processing is executed in both the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143.

Next, the various control processes executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be explained. The processes of the MPU 342 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, normal processing for performance control, and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal. Of these, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing in the main control device 162 (Figure 15), so Figure 15 will be used for the explanation.

<NMI interrupt processing>
15, in the NMI interrupt process, first in step S11, data in the usage registers provided in the MPU 342 is saved to a predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or to the backup RAM 345. In step S12, a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step S13, the saved data is restored to the usage registers of the MPU 342, and then the NMI interrupt process is terminated. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the usage registers of the MPU 342, the processes of steps S11 and S13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 78. The main processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while an external power source is being supplied, or when an external power source is supplied while the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is in the on state).

In step S5101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed, and in step S5102, access to RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step S5103, the used area of RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step S5104, initialization process of RAM 344 is executed. Thereafter, the main process is terminated, and the process proceeds to normal process described below.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S5201, a power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process is to issue a power-on notification in response to the power being turned on for the pachinko machine 10.

If a power outage occurs when a game is not being played (as in the state before the power is turned on), a message such as "Power has been turned on" is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 as the power-on notification. This message display continues for a predetermined period of time, after which a predetermined demo video is displayed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a game round and the game is resumed after the power is turned on (after power is restored), a message such as "The screen will return shortly" is displayed on the display screen G as a power-on notification. At that time, the main display unit 81 will be in a state where the next game round will be played, but the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and no variable display is performed due to them. Such variable display is performed from the start of the next game round (the game round that starts after power is turned on) after power is turned on (after power is restored). The message display is erased when the next game round ends (when the next game round starts).

In addition, in both cases where a power outage occurs when a game round is not being played or when a power outage occurs during a game round, no sound is output from the speaker unit 29 and a silent state is maintained while the power-on notification is being executed. Sound is output from the start of the game round that begins after power is turned on (or the start of the next game round if a subsequent game round is being played when power is restored). With this configuration, when the hall power supply to which multiple pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on during preparations for business at the game hall, etc., and the pachinko machines 10 are started up simultaneously, it is possible to prevent sounds from being output simultaneously from each pachinko machine 10, which would cause noise.

In step S5202, a process for restoring the hold notice is executed to display the hold image in the display mode before the power failure. The details of this process will be described later. Note that the processes of steps S5201 and S5202 are executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After execution of step S5202, external signal output processing is executed in step S5203. In the external signal output processing, the command set in the previous normal processing is sent to the display control device 350, and control signals for driving and controlling the various lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 are sent. In step S5204, counter update processing is executed to update the counter values provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344.

In step S5205, a command reception process is executed to receive a command from the main control device 162. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344, as already described. In step S5206, the performance setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step S5207, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not set, i.e., if a power outage has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S5208, where it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step S5203 and executes the processes from step S5203 onward. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the remaining time may be used to update the values of various counters, as in the normal processing in the main control unit 162 (Figure 20).

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step S5207 (if the power outage flag is set), this means that a power outage has occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5209, and on-hold image information is created that indicates in what display mode each on-hold image was displayed before (immediately before) the power outage occurred. In this step, the process refers to the performance scenario data for the on-hold notice performance stored in RAM 344, and determines whether there are on-hold images displayed in a specific display mode, and if such on-hold images exist, in what display mode they are displayed, and creates on-hold image information based on the determination results.

In step S5210, information about the reserved image is stored in backup RAM 345. In addition to the reserved image information created in step S5209, the information stored in reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 is also stored in backup RAM 345, and this information is stored and held as information for displaying the reserved image when power is restored. The information stored in reserved memory area 344c includes reserved information stored in each area set for the first special chart and the second special chart (values of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, etc.), as well as information indicating the number of reserved items.

Note that the process of storing the reserved image information created in step S5209 and the process of storing the information stored in the reserved memory area 344c do not necessarily need to be performed in the same step, and one of the storage processes may be performed first, followed by the other storage process.

In step S5211, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in backup RAM 345. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value of information related to the reserved image stored in backup RAM 345. In step S5212, access to RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

<Processing for restoring pending notice>
The process for restoring the pending notice in step S5202 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 80.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not stored, this means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 has run out and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 has been lost. In this case, the process for restoring the hold notice is terminated.

If a power outage flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S5302, where a RAM judgment value is calculated. In the following step S5303, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step S5302 is compared with the RAM judgment value saved when the power outage occurred (step S5211), and it is determined whether or not the two match.

If the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is deemed abnormal, and the data stored in backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for restoring the pending notice is terminated. The validity of the data stored in backup RAM 345 can also be determined by whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of backup RAM 345 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5304, where the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referenced to determine the number of items on hold at the time of the power outage.

In step S5305, it is determined whether the number of reserved items identified in step S5304 is 0. If the number of reserved items is 0, that is, if a power outage occurred when there are no reserved items, the process for restoring the reserved notification is terminated.

If the number of pending images is not 0, the process proceeds to step S5306, where display mode setting processing is executed. This processing is for setting the display mode of the pending image to be displayed after power is restored. Here, the display mode setting processing of step S5306 is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 81.

In step S5401, the data stored in backup RAM 345 is referenced to ascertain the display mode of each pending image before (just before) the power outage occurred. In step S5402, based on the results of the determination in step S5401, it is determined whether or not there are any pending images that were displayed in a specific display mode. If there are no pending images that were displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S5403, where the display mode of all pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image that was displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step S5404 and determine whether the display mode of that hold image (target hold image) is equal to or greater than a specified display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd). If the display mode of the target hold image is a mode lower than the specified display mode (e.g., green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), proceed to step S5405 and set the display mode of that hold image to the specific display mode before the power outage. In step S5406, the display mode of hold images other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe), proceed to step S5407, and set the display mode of the hold image to a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (e.g., green display mode HMc). In other words, if the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target hold image when power is restored is limited to a mode lower than the specific display mode before the power outage.

In step S5408, the display mode of the pending images other than the target pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step S5409, a return notice flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the process for restoring the on-hold notice (FIG. 80), after executing the display mode setting process of step S5306, in step S5307, the display control device 350 is controlled so that each on-hold image is displayed in the display mode set in step S5306. In step S5308, the on-hold information etc. stored in the backup RAM 345 is stored (restored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 344. In step S5309, the power outage flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is erased, and then the process for restoring the on-hold notice is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 82. This process is executed in step S1305 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the special chart change display process in Fig. 41. In Fig. 82, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 41, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified. For convenience, in Fig. 82, the description of the first execution process of the reserved notice is omitted.

If the result of step S1804 is negative and the display is changing, processing for the display is in progress is executed in step S1805. In step S5501, it is determined whether the current special chart play round is the play round of the reserved image (target reserved image) that was displayed in a specific display mode before the power was cut off. If it is not the play round of the target reserved image, the processing for the special chart change display is terminated.

If it is the play time of the target reserved image, the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is performed in step S5502, and then the special chart change display process is terminated. The fourth execution process of the reserved notice is intended to promote the display mode of the reserved image to a higher mode in the play time of the target reserved image.

<Fourth execution process of pending notice>
The fourth execution process of the pending notice in step S5502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 83.

First, in step S5601, it is determined whether a recovery notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The recovery notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that, when power is restored, a process should be executed to change the display mode of the pending image, which has been set to a lower display mode than the specific display mode before the power outage, to a higher display mode. If the recovery notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the return notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S5602, where it is determined whether or not a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the display mode of the target reserved image should be promoted, and is similar to the promotion flag in the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, in step S5603, it is determined whether or not a determined flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If a determined flag is stored, the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the determined flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S5604, and it is determined whether or not any reserved change points remain in the ongoing game round. If there are no reserved change points remaining, the process proceeds to step S5611, and the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

If pending change points remain, proceed to step S5605 to execute the pending notice promotion process, and then terminate the pending notice fourth execution process. Here, the pending notice promotion process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.

In the promotion process, first, in step S5701, the current display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. Note that the current display mode is the display mode set in step S5407 of the display mode setting process (Figure 81).

In step S5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image is identified. This is based on the fluctuation start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) sent from the main control device 162 at the start of a game round (a game round currently being played) of the target reserved image.

In step S5703, a promotion judgment of the hold notice performance is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S5701, the current display mode grasped in step S5702, and the promotion judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The promotion judgment is to judge whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D to a specific display mode higher than the current state.

In the promotion judgment table, an upper limit of the display mode is set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, similar to the promotion judgment table (Figure 47) in the first embodiment described above. In step S5703, the promotion judgment table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is a lower display mode than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if it is a lower display mode, the display mode is allowed to be promoted, and if not, promotion is not allowed.

After step S5703 is executed, a judged flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step S5704. The judged flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a promotion judgement has been executed.

In step S5705, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step S5703 allows the display mode to be promoted. If promotion is not allowed, the process exits from the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step S5611 (Figure 83), where the return notice flag is cleared and the fourth execution process for the pending notice is terminated.

If promotion is allowed, the process proceeds to step S5706, where a lottery process for the promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines the timing (hold change point) at which the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D will be changed to which display mode. The lottery for the promotion scenario is performed based on the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 and the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, similar to step S2405 (Figure 46) in the first embodiment described above.

In step S5707, promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step S5706 is executed. In step S5708, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the pending notice promotion process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process of the on-hold notice (FIG. 83), if a positive judgment is made in step S5602 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S5606, where it is determined whether it is time to promote the display mode. This judgment is made based on the result of the promotion scenario setting in step S5707. If it is not time to promote, the fourth execution process of the on-hold notice is terminated.

If it is the time to promote, proceed to step S5607, and determine the display mode to which the current change process will be changed (higher display mode) based on the promotion scenario setting results. In the following step S5608, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step S5607. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set so as to include information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350.

In step S5609, it is determined whether the display mode determined in step S5607 or the display mode set as the destination in step S5608 is the final display mode in the promotion performance. For example, if the promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages by multiple change processes, and if the current change process is an intermediate process, it is determined that the display mode is not the final display mode, and the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the final display mode, in step S5610, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. In the following step S5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Display mode of pending images before and after power outage>
The display mode of the reserved image before the power failure and after the power recovery will be described. First, a case where a reserved image in the green display mode HMc exists before the power failure occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when a game round of the first special chart is being played, there are three reserved information items for the first special chart, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in the green display mode HMc. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off, and the display on the display screen G disappears. As a result, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are no longer displayed.

At this time, the performance control device 143 stores information about the reserved image in the backup RAM 345. Since the backup RAM 345 is supplied with power for data retention during power outage from the power supply and launch control device 191, the information about the reserved image stored in the backup RAM 345 is retained even during the power outage.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration process (steps S2004 to S2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special chart) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special chart display unit 43.

When power is restored, the performance control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step S5201) to notify the user that power has been turned on. This causes a text display 461, such as "Screen will return shortly," to be displayed on the display screen G.

The performance control device 143 also executes a process for restoring the on-hold notice (step S5202) to restore the display of the on-hold images. In the process for restoring the on-hold notice, the number of on-hold images and the display mode of each on-hold image before the power outage are determined based on information about the on-hold images stored in the backup RAM 345, and it is determined whether any of the on-hold images determined were displayed in a specific display mode. If any on-hold images were displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether the display mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd), and the display mode when power is restored is set based on the result.

Here, the display mode before the power outage occurred is the green display mode HMc, which is a lower mode than the specified display mode, so the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the display mode before the power outage occurred. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), each hold image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power outage occurred.

Incidentally, since information regarding the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. Therefore, the text display 461 as the power-on notification and each pending image that is restored based on information regarding the pending images stored in the backup RAM 345 are displayed on a background 462 for when power is restored that is different from the background when the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed. The background 462 for when power is restored is, for example, a monochrome background displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

After that, when the restarted next round of play is finished, each reserved image is shifted to the lower unit reserved display area as shown in FIG. 85(c). As the next round of play begins, the display screen G changes to show the rows of symbols Z1 to Z3, and the screen returns to normal.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 86 what happens when a pending image in red display mode HMd exists before the power outage occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), when a game round of the first special symbol is being played, there are three reserved information pieces of the first special symbol, and the reserved image HW displayed in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in a red display mode HMd. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off, and the display on the display screen G disappears.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the game round that was interrupted when the power outage occurred (the game round of the first special chart) is resumed on the special chart display unit 43. In addition, the performance control device 143 executes a process for restoring the hold notice, and determines whether the specific display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage occurred is equal to or greater than the predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the on-hold image HW before the power outage occurred is the red display mode HMd, which is a mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, so the display mode of the on-hold image HW when power is restored is set to the green display mode HMc, which is lower than the display mode before the power outage. As a result, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display of each on-hold image is restored with the display mode of the on-hold image HW set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when it is time to start playing the reserved image HW, the performance control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW based on the change start command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on the change pattern, it determines whether or not to promote the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

That is, if the display mode before the power failure occurs is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, it is temporarily restored to a lower display mode than the display mode before the power failure, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is reset based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round. As a result, if it is determined that the image is to be promoted to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode), the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is changed from the green display mode HMc to the red display mode HMd, as shown in FIG. 86(c). Note that the game round presentation (reach presentation, etc.) implemented in the game round of the reserved image HW is determined based on the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, and therefore the display mode of the reserved image HW that is determined to be promoted based on the fluctuation pattern will be consistent with the game round presentation.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a power outage occurs while the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (when the hold notice performance is being executed), and the power outage is then resolved and power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set based on the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage, and the hold notice performance is executed again.

In this embodiment, a hold notice performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold pre-read process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as specific display modes with different jackpot expectancies, the expectancy can be indicated by assigning a large or small value, which is advantageous in arousing the player's anticipation. Under such a configuration, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a hold notice performance and then the power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurs is re-executed. This allows the hold notice performance to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and the hold notice performance is prevented from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the abnormality occurred, so that the hold notice performance that was being performed before the power outage can be preferably restored.

In the event of a power outage, information regarding the on-hold image is stored in the backup RAM 345, making it possible to retain information corresponding to the display mode of the on-hold image even after a power outage occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power outage and control over the reserved image is stopped, after power is restored, the display mode of the target reserved image HW before the power outage can be understood by referring to the information stored in the backup RAM 345. This makes it possible to preferably restore the display mode of the target reserved image HW to the display mode before the power outage when the reserved notice performance is executed again after power is restored.

If the display mode of the target pending image HW before the power outage is a notification mode higher than a specified mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored is configured to be limited to the specified mode or lower.

For example, if a power outage causes a change in the reserved ball information stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, an inconsistency will occur between the results of the reserved ball read before the power outage and the results of the win/lose judgment and the selection of the game round presentation performed in the game round after power is restored. In such a case, if the reserved ball advance notice performance before the power outage suggests a high level of expectation, and this is then re-executed as is after power is restored, the notification results for the game round (the results of the win/lose judgment) and the game round presentation performed in the game round will be inconsistent with the level of expectation suggested by the reserved ball advance notice performance, which could give the player an unpleasant impression.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was in effect when the power outage occurred was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain degree of expectation, the hold notification performance is restricted to a lower level of display mode and re-executed. This prevents the hold notification performance from suggesting a degree of expectation that does not match the notification results for the game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode during the play of the target reserved image HW, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, the display mode is promoted to a higher level by playing the target reserved image HW, so the expected degree of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the decision as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the win/loss judgment made at the time of the game round and the result of the selection of the variation pattern.

In the above configuration, the results after power is restored are used as a basis for determining whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target pending image HW for the winning/losing judgment and the selection of the game round presentation. This allows the above upgrade to be performed while being consistent with the notification results that are actually performed in the game round after power is restored.

When power is restored after a power outage, the power restoration process is executed, and a setting process (return process for the hold notice) is executed to re-execute the hold notice performance.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the hold notification performance can be quickly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs during a game round and there is a period after power is restored during which the pattern change display is not performed on the display screen G, the hold notification performance can be re-executed before the pattern change display is restored.

Seventh embodiment
In the sixth embodiment, the performance control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345, but in this embodiment, this is not provided, and the performance control device 143 does not have a backup function. This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 87 to 91. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

The performance control device 143 in this embodiment has the same electrical configuration as the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment, and does not have a backup RAM 345. It also does not have a function for backing up data stored in the RAM 344. For this reason, if a power outage occurs when a hold exists (when a hold image is displayed on the hold display unit 200), the hold information and the like held by the performance control device 143 will be lost.

In this embodiment, the signal line that transmits the power failure signal output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the performance control device 143, and the power failure signal is not input to the performance control device 143.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved ball pre-reading process (Fig. 28) of the main control device 162 stores the processing results (pre-reading results of the variation pattern lottery, etc.) in the reserved ball storage area 314b (Fig. 11) of the RAM 314. That is, in addition to the reserved information (values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS), each area set in the reserved ball storage area 314b stores the reserved information as well as the results of the reserved pre-reading performed on that reserved information.

The information regarding the results of the read-ahead processing stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b continues to be stored in the RAM 314 without being erased even after the information is sent to the performance control device 143. The reason for this configuration is to make it possible to know the results of the reserved read-ahead processing that was performed before the power outage occurred when power is subsequently restored after a power outage occurs.

In other words, in a normal pachinko machine, after the reserved read-ahead process is executed in the main control device 162 and the result is sent to the performance control device 143 as a reserved command or the like, the read-ahead result is not used in the control process on the main control device 162 side, so there is no need to leave the information on the main control device 162 side. For this reason, after sending to the performance control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information on the read-ahead result was stored and erase the information by overwriting the read-ahead result for the subsequent reserved information, etc.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the information regarding the read-ahead results is stored in RAM 314 even after the information is sent to the performance control device 143. In the event of a power outage, power for use during power outage is supplied to RAM 314 from the power source and launch control device 191, and the information in RAM 314 is retained without being erased. For this reason, with the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to retain information regarding the read-ahead results when a power outage occurs, and when power is restored after the power outage, it becomes possible to know the results of the pending read-ahead process that was performed before the power outage occurred.

The information about the look-ahead results stored in RAM 314 is not permanently stored, but is erased when the reserved information is erased. In other words, the information about the look-ahead results in RAM 314 is erased in response to the execution of a play round of the reserved information that was the subject of the reserved look-ahead process.

Incidentally, the reason why the storage area for information related to the look-ahead results is reserved ball storage area 314b is to take into consideration the convenience of determining which reserved information the information related to the look-ahead results corresponds to, and of allocating storage areas so that other information is not inadvertently overwritten. Therefore, the storage area for this information does not necessarily have to be reserved ball storage area 314b, but may be another storage area in RAM 314.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 is explained below.

<Main processing>
The main processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of Fig. 87(a). This processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main processing of Fig. 19. In Fig. 87(a), the same steps as those in Fig. 19 are given the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

If the result of step S2003 is negative (the RAM erase switch has not been pressed), step S2004 determines whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. If a power outage flag is stored, i.e., if power is restored after a power outage occurs and data is stored in RAM 314, step S2005 calculates a RAM determination value.

In step S2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal, and if it is normal, the stack pointer is restored in step S2007. In step S2008, a power recovery command is output.

In step S6101, a hold command for when power is restored is set based on the information stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314, and output to the performance control device 143. The hold command for when power is restored includes information indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of the power outage, information indicating the results of the hold read performed before the power outage occurred, and the like. After step S6101 is executed, the process of step S2009 (clearing the power outage flag) is executed.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 is explained below.

<Normal processing>
The normal process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87(b). This process is executed in place of the normal process of Fig. 79. As shown in Fig. 87(b), the normal process according to this embodiment does not include a backup process for reserved information in the event of a power outage.

Specifically, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, in step S5207, it is checked whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345 to determine whether a power outage occurs, and if a power outage flag is stored (if a power outage occurs), the processing of steps S5209 to S5212 is executed, but in the normal processing of FIG. 87(b) according to this embodiment, these processes are not provided. Also, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a process for restoring the reserved notice is executed in step S5202, but in the normal processing of FIG. 87(b) according to this embodiment, such a process is not provided, and after the power on notification process of step S5201 is executed, the external output process of step S5203 is executed.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 88. This process is executed in step S5206 of the normal process (Fig. 87(b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of Fig. 30. In Fig. 88, the same processes as those in Fig. 30 are given the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S6201, it is determined whether a hold command at power restoration has been received from the main control unit 162. The hold command at power restoration is output when power is restored from a power outage (step S6101 in FIG. 87(a)), and the command includes information indicating the number of items on hold at the time the power outage occurred, information indicating the results of the hold look-ahead performed before the power outage occurred, etc.

If a hold command for when power is restored has been received, the process proceeds to step S6202, where the number of items on hold at the time of the power outage is determined based on the hold command for when power is restored from the main control unit 162. In step S6203, it is determined whether the number of items on hold determined in step S6202 is 0. If the number of items on hold is not 0, the process proceeds to step S6204, where a display mode setting process is executed to set the display mode of the hold image after power is restored. The display mode setting process will now be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 89.

First, in step S6301, the fluctuation pattern of each pending information is grasped based on the power recovery pending command from the main control unit 162. This fluctuation pattern was read in advance by the pending information read-ahead process (FIG. 28) of the main control unit 162 before the power outage occurred. Since the power recovery pending command contains information on fluctuation patterns for the number of pending items grasped in step S6202, in this step, all of these fluctuation patterns are grasped.

When sending a hold command when power is restored that includes information on the fluctuation pattern for the number of reserved items, it is expected that the amount of data will be large or that the information on the fluctuation pattern may not be able to be contained, so the information may be sent in multiple installments. Specifically, a hold command when power is restored may first be sent in a form that does not include information on the fluctuation pattern, and the command may be followed by sequentially sending information on the fluctuation pattern for each reserved item.

In step S6302, based on the results of step S6301, it is determined whether or not there is pending information about a jackpot. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation patterns determined in step S6301 include a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, and it is determined whether or not pending information that predicted a jackpot before the power outage occurred is present.

If there is pending information for a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S6303, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when a jackpot is predicted in advance, and is, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step S6304, a return notice flag is set in correspondence with the reserved image (target reserved image). The return notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a process (promotion process) should be executed to change the display mode of the reserved image in the game round of the target reserved image. The return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, or may be stored in a corresponding area (the area to which the target reserved image corresponds) in the reserved memory area 344c of the RAM 344 so that it is shifted together with the reserved information of the target reserved image.

After execution of step S6304 or if a negative judgment is made in step S6302 (there is no pending information of a jackpot), in step S6305, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach effect exists in the fluctuation patterns grasped in step S6301. Specifically, it is judged whether or not any of fluctuation patterns 5H, 6H, 12H, 13H, 24H, and 25H exists. This step is to judge whether or not the pending information, which is a failure in the pre-read result before the power outage, includes any corresponding to a reach effect with a rank of a predetermined or higher probability of winning.

If there is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach performance, proceed to step S6306, and set the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the reserved information in which the fluctuation pattern has been pre-read to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, for example, the blue display mode HMb. In step S6307, a return notice flag is set in correspondence with the reserved image.

After execution of step S6307 or if a negative judgment is made in step S6305 (if there is no fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach performance), step S6308 judges whether there is any reserved information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped in step S6301. Note that examples of cases in which the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped include when a power outage occurs and part of the information indicating the look-ahead result is corrupted, or when part of the data is corrupted due to noise or the like when the power recovery hold command is sent.

If there is pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, proceed to step S6309, and set the display mode of the pending image corresponding to that pending information to the normal display mode HMa. In step S6310, set the return notice flag corresponding to that pending image.

After execution of step S6310 or if a negative judgment is made in step S6308 (if there is no pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), in step S6311, the display mode of the remaining pending images (pending images whose display mode has not been set by steps S6302 to S6310) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the explanation of the performance setting process (FIG. 88), after the display mode setting process of step S6204 is executed, in step S6205, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the pending image of the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G. After execution of step S6205, the process proceeds to step S1301, and thereafter, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed.

If the determination in step S6201 is negative (the power recovery hold command has not been received), steps S6202 to S6205 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1301. If the determination in step S6203 is negative (the number of held items is 0), steps S6204 and S6205 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1301.

By the above process, when power is restored after a power outage occurs, the reserved image of the reserved information in which a jackpot result was predicted is displayed in the first specific display mode, and the reserved image of the reserved information in which a miss result corresponding to a reach effect with a high probability of winning was predicted is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the display mode of the target reserved image is upgraded by the fourth execution process of the reserved notice in step S5502 in the specific change display process (Figure 82). In other words, the display mode of the target reserved image is reset based on the change start command sent after power is restored. Note that the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is the same as in the sixth embodiment above, so a description will be omitted.

<Display mode of pending images before and after power outage>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the power failure will be described. First, the case where the big win result was pre-read before the power failure occurs will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), when a game round of the first special chart is being played, there are three reserved information items of the first special chart, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in a red display mode HMd. The result of the preview of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a jackpot result, and the results of the preview of the reserved information corresponding to the other reserved images are all miss results (complete misses).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off and the display on the display screen G disappears. As a result, all pending images, including the pending image HW, are no longer displayed.

At this time, the RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 is supplied with power for data retention from the power supply and launch control unit 191 during a power outage, so the data stored in the RAM 314 is retained even during the power outage. The data stored in the RAM 314 includes the results of the hold pre-read process (step S305) performed on the hold information of each of the hold images before the power outage occurred.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration process (steps S2004 to S2010) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special chart) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special chart display unit 43.

When power is restored, the main control unit 162 reads out information from the data stored in RAM 314, such as information indicating the number of reserved items, information indicating whether each reserved item corresponds to the first or second special chart, and information on the results of the reserved item read-ahead process for each reserved item (variation pattern), and transmits these as a power restoration reserved item command to the performance control unit 143 (step S6101).

The performance control device 143 executes a process to restore the display of the reserved image based on the various information sent from the main control device 162 (steps S6202 to S6205). In this process, the display mode of the reserved image HW in which the jackpot result was predicted is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other reserved images is set to the normal display mode HMa. At this time, if there is reserved information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to that reserved information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the display mode of the on-hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other on-hold images is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display of each on-hold image is restored. When power is restored, the performance control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step S5201) to issue a power-on notification, and so a text display 461 such as "Screen will return shortly" is displayed on the display screen G. Therefore, each on-hold image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the above-mentioned text display 461.

After that, when it is time to start playing the reserved image HW, the performance control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW based on the change start command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on the change pattern, it determines whether or not to promote the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

In other words, the reserved image HW of the reserved information for which the jackpot result was predicted before the power outage occurred is temporarily displayed in a display mode below a predetermined value (first specific display mode), and the display mode of the reserved image HW is reset based on the variation start command sent at the start of a game round. As a result, when it is determined that the image should be promoted to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe), the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed to the higher mode (e.g., red display mode HMd) in the execution display area D, as shown in FIG. 90(c).

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern understood from the fluctuation start command sent at the start of a game round of the reserved image HW does not correspond to a jackpot, i.e., if a jackpot is not announced in that game round, promotion to a higher display mode is not permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 91 what happens when the SP out-of-reach result and the SPSP out-of-reach result are predicted in advance before the power outage occurs.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when a game round of the first special chart is being played, there are three reserved information items for the first special chart separately, the reserved image HW1 in the first unit reserved display area Ga1 is displayed in blue display mode HMb, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in green display mode HMc.

The predicted result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW1 is variation pattern 3H (SP reach A miss), and the predicted result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW2 is variation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B miss). Note that the predicted result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image in the second unit pending display area Ga2 is variation pattern 1H (complete miss).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off and the display on the display screen G disappears. When the power outage is then resolved and power is restored, the rest of the game round (the game round of the first special chart) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special chart display unit 43.

The performance control device 143 also executes processing to restore the display of the reserved image based on the power recovery reserved command sent from the main control device 162 (steps S6202 to S6205). At this time, for the reserved image HW1 in which a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SP reach failure (fluctuation pattern 3H) has been pre-read, the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and for the reserved image HW2 in which a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a higher level SPSP reach failure (fluctuation pattern 6H) has been pre-read, the display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the display of each pending image is restored with the display mode of pending image HW1 set to the normal display mode HMa and the display mode of pending image HW2 set to the blue display mode HMb. In other words, pending images of pending information corresponding to reach-miss performances lower than a predetermined rank are displayed in the normal display mode HMa regardless of whether they were displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage occurred, and pending images of pending information corresponding to reach performances of a predetermined rank or higher are displayed restricted to a display mode below a predetermined level (second specific display mode).

When a play round of the reserved image HW2 is executed, a determination is made as to whether to promote to a higher display mode, as this is the same as when the jackpot result is predicted in advance as described with reference to Figure 90, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a power outage occurs while the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (when the hold notice performance is being executed), and the power outage is then resolved and power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set based on the results of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage, and the hold notice performance is executed again.

In this embodiment, the hold notice performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as the specific display mode with different jackpot expectancies, the expectancy can be indicated by assigning a large or small value, which is advantageous in arousing the player's anticipation. Under such a configuration, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the hold notice performance and then the power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. This allows the hold notice performance to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and the hold notice performance is prevented from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process before the abnormality occurred, so that the hold notice performance can be preferably re-executed after the power is restored.

By storing the winning/losing results and fluctuation patterns read in advance by the reserved ball read-ahead process in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314, the information corresponding to the above-mentioned read-ahead results can be retained even after a power outage occurs.

In the above configuration, when a power outage occurs, the information corresponding to the pre-read result is not lost but is retained. Therefore, after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be determined based on the information retained in RAM 314, making it possible to preferably replay the hold notification performance after power is restored.

When executing the hold notification performance after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a specified mode (green display mode HMc) or lower.

For example, if a change occurs in the reserved ball storage area 314b due to the influence of a power outage, an inconsistency occurs between the result of the reserved ball pre-read performed before the power outage and the result of the hit/miss judgment performed in the game round after the power is restored, or the selection result of the game round presentation. In such a case, if the reserved ball pre-reading performance suggests a high expectation level before the power outage and is replayed as is after the power is restored, the notification result in the game round (the result of the hit/miss judgment) and the game round presentation performed in the game round may not be consistent with the expectation level suggested by the reserved ball pre-reading performance, which may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was performed at the time of the power outage was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain degree of expectation, the reserved ball pre-reading performance is restricted to a lower display mode and replayed. This prevents the reserved ball pre-reading performance from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification result in the game round, making it possible to suitably prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode during the play of the target reserved image HW, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, the display mode is promoted to a higher level by playing the target reserved image HW, so the expected degree of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the decision as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the win/loss judgment made at the time of the game round and the result of the selection of the variation pattern.

In the above configuration, the results after power is restored are used as a basis for determining whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target pending image HW for the winning/losing judgment and the selection of the game round presentation. This allows the above upgrade to be performed while being consistent with the notification results that are actually performed in the game round after power is restored.

After power is restored, if the results of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage cannot be identified, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if the results of the reserve pre-reading process performed before the power outage cannot be identified for some of the reserved images, and the display of the reserved images is cancelled, there is a concern that the number of reserved balls cannot be properly notified to the player. In addition, when the reserved image for which the results of the reserve pre-reading process can be identified is replayed (the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode), the display of the reserved image for which the results of the reserve pre-reading process cannot be identified is lost, which may result in a shift in the order of the play times and the reserved image set to the specific display mode, resulting in a suggestion of the degree of expectation corresponding to a different play time. In this regard, the present configuration distinguishes between reserved images for which the results of the reserve pre-reading process performed before the power outage can be identified and reserved images for which the results cannot be identified, and the latter is redisplayed in the normal display mode HMa, making it possible to properly notify the player of the number of reserved balls while appropriately performing the reserve pre-reading performance for the other reserved images.

When power is restored from a power outage, the main control unit 162 outputs a hold command when power is restored to the performance control unit 143, and based on the performance control unit 143 receiving the hold command when power is restored, it executes a setting process (display mode setting process) to re-execute the hold notice performance.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the hold notification performance can be quickly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs during a game round and there is a period after power is restored during which the pattern change display is not performed on the display screen G, the hold notification performance can be re-executed before the pattern change display is restored.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, when the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode, the switching of the presentation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 92 to 94. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the presentation mode was configured to be switched by manual operation, but in this embodiment, the presentation mode is configured to be switched automatically without operation of the presentation operation unit 36. The presentation modes include presentation mode A and presentation mode B, which, like the first embodiment, differ in the frequency with which the hold notice presentation occurs. Specifically, presentation mode A is configured to function as a mode in which the hold notice presentation is likely to be executed and the presentation is easy to enjoy, while presentation mode B is configured to function as a mode in which the hold notice presentation is unlikely to be executed, but which has a high probability of winning if it is executed.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The presentation mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 92. This process is executed in step S1307 of the presentation setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed instead of the presentation mode switching process of Fig. 42.

First, in step S7101, it is determined whether it is time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes. In this embodiment, a period in a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state in which a presentation that spans multiple game rounds, such as continuous presentations, is not being performed) is set as the effective period for switching presentation modes, and during this effective period, a lottery for switching presentation modes is held at a predetermined timing in each game round (for example, the start timing of a game round). In this step, it is determined whether it is time to hold the lottery. If it is not time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes, the presentation mode switching process is terminated as is in order to maintain the current presentation mode.

If it is time to draw a lottery for switching the presentation mode, proceed to step S7102 and execute a first mode switching lottery to draw a lottery for switching the presentation mode. In this step, the lottery is executed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing a lottery for whether or not to switch the presentation mode. Note that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of presentation mode in which you are currently in, or the winning probability may vary depending on the presentation mode in which you are currently in.

In step S7103, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S7102 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a losing result, the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated to maintain the current presentation mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S7104, where mode switching determination processing is executed. The mode switching determination processing is for determining whether or not switching of the presentation mode is permitted. Here, the mode switching determination processing of step S7104 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 93.

First, in step S7201, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to ascertain the current number of pending items. In step S7202, it is determined whether the number of pending items ascertained in step S7201 is 0. If the number of pending items is 0, in step S7203 it is determined that switching of the presentation mode is permitted, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated.

If the number of reserved images is not 0, the current display mode of each reserved image is determined in step S7204. In the following step S7205, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved image displayed in a specific display mode (any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe) based on the determination result in step S7204. If there is no reserved image in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the presentation mode switching is allowed.

If a reserved image of a specific display mode is present, in step S7206, it is determined whether the current mode switch is a switch from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. In other words, it is determined whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a higher occurrence frequency of reserved preview performance to a presentation mode with a lower occurrence frequency (in other words, whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a lower chance of winning the reserved preview performance to a presentation mode with a higher chance).

If it is to switch to presentation mode B, proceed to step S7207 and determine whether the pre-read result for the reserved information of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is a jackpot result. If the pre-read result is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step S7208 that the presentation mode switching is not permitted, and then the mode switching determination process ends. Generally, in a win/loss determination, the probability of missing is much higher than the probability of winning (jackpot probability), and most reserved pre-read results are misses, so the majority of the determinations in step S7207 above are negative, and the presentation mode switching is not permitted. In other words, in a situation where a reserved image in a specific display mode is present when switching to presentation mode B, the presentation mode switching is basically not permitted and is restricted.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7207 (if the pre-read result is a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step S7209, where a second mode switching lottery is executed to re-draw the mode switching. In this step, the lottery is executed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The second mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing a lottery for whether or not to switch the performance mode, similar to the first mode switching lottery table. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table, or it may be different.

In step S7210, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S7209 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a losing result, the process proceeds to step S7208, where it is determined that switching of the presentation mode is not permitted.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the switching of the presentation mode is permitted. In other words, in some cases where the pre-read result is a jackpot result, the switching of the presentation mode is exceptionally permitted even if a reserved image of a specific display mode is displayed.

As already explained, if there is a reserved image in a specific display mode and there is no reserved jackpot read-ahead, switching of presentation modes is not permitted, and even if there is a reserved jackpot read-ahead, if the player loses the second mode switching lottery, switching of presentation modes is not permitted. In other words, since it is a rare case that switching of presentation modes is permitted in a situation where there is a reserved image in a specific display mode, the player will recognize this as a violation of the rules, and the presentation will result in a guaranteed jackpot.

If the judgment in step S7206 above is negative (switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A), that is, switching from a presentation mode with a lower frequency of occurrence of the hold preview presentation to a presentation mode with a higher frequency (in other words, switching from a presentation mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot for the hold preview presentation to a presentation mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot for the hold preview presentation), then in step S7211 it is judged whether the display mode of the hold image displayed in a specific display mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined mode (e.g., green display mode HMc).

If the display mode is a lower mode than the predetermined mode (for example, blue display mode HMb), proceed to step S7203 and determine that the presentation mode switching is permitted. In other words, when switching to presentation mode A, even if a reserved image of a specific display mode is displayed, if the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode, the presentation mode switching is permitted. In this case, the presentation mode switching is performed with the specific display mode of the reserved image maintained. Note that, if the form of the reserved image changes depending on the presentation mode, the form is changed and the display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching.

If a positive judgment is made in step S7211 (if the display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode), then in step S7207, for the reserved image whose display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode, it is judged whether or not the result of the advance reading of the reserved information is a jackpot result. After that, the processing of steps S7208 to S7210 is executed, and the switching of the presentation mode is permitted on the condition that the second mode switching lottery has been won.

Returning to the explanation of the presentation mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching judgment process of step S7104, in step S7105, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment process of step S7104 is that mode switching is permitted. If the result is that mode switching is not permitted, the presentation mode switching process is terminated as is to maintain the current presentation mode.

If the result indicates that mode switching is permitted, the process proceeds to step S7106, where a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B. Note that the presentation mode may be switched at the start of a game round, or during a game round.

In step S7107, the presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second execution process of the pending notice in step S1702 in the shift command response process (Figure 40), the third execution process in step S1808 in the special chart change display process (Figure 41), and any processes associated with them are not executed.

<Regarding restrictions on switching between performance modes>
The mode of limiting switching of the presentation mode will be described with reference to Fig. 94. First, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described with reference to Fig. 94(a).

When the time comes to switch presentation modes, if there are no reserved items, or if there are reserved items but no reserved image in a specific display mode, switching of presentation modes is permitted.

When a reserved image of a specific display mode is present, basically, switching of presentation modes is not permitted. In other words, when switching from presentation mode A, which has a relatively high occurrence frequency of reserved notice presentations (presentation mode in which the reserved notice presentation has a relatively low chance of winning), to presentation mode B, which has a relatively low occurrence frequency (presentation mode in which the reserved notice presentation has a relatively high chance of winning), switching of presentation modes is restricted on the condition that a reserved image of a specific display mode is present.

However, even if there are pending images in a specific display mode, if one of them contains a jackpot result that has been pre-read, then exceptionally, a change in presentation mode is permitted. In this case, as already explained, a presentation will result in a presentation where a jackpot is confirmed due to a presentation inconsistency. Note that if there is pending information in which a jackpot result has been pre-read, and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, then a change in presentation mode is permitted as it is assumed that there are no pending images in a specific display mode.

Next, switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A will be explained with reference to Figure 94 (b).

When the time to switch presentation modes arrives and there are no reserved items, or if there are reserved items but no reserved image in a specific display mode, switching of presentation modes is permitted, just as when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B.

When a reserved image of a specific display mode exists, whether or not mode switching is permitted depends on that display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the reserved image displayed in a specific display mode is a display mode lower than the specified display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the presentation mode is permitted. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a relatively low occurrence frequency of reserved notice presentations (presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot for the reserved notice presentation is relatively high), to presentation mode A, which has a relatively high occurrence frequency (presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot for the reserved notice presentation is relatively low), the switching restrictions are relaxed compared to the opposite case. In this case, the display mode for the reserved image is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode before the mode switching is maintained.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the reserved image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, switching of the presentation mode is not permitted unless a jackpot result has been predicted in advance. In other words, if the reserved preview presentation informs the player of a certain degree of expectation, switching of the presentation mode is restricted.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a hold preview performance in which the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode is being performed, the change of performance mode is restricted.

In this embodiment, a hold preview performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold pre-read process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, because the mode is switched between performance mode A and performance mode B, the player's mood can be changed during play, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In this configuration, for example, if the performance mode is switched while the hold preview performance is being executed, there is a concern that the player's attention to the hold preview performance will decrease due to the distraction of the change in performance mode, or conversely, the player may be so focused on the hold preview performance that the performance mode will change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, the switching of presentation modes is restricted when a hold notice performance is being executed, thereby preventing overlapping between the execution of the hold notice performance and the switching of presentation modes. This allows the execution of the hold notice performance and the switching of presentation modes to be carried out in a way that is easy for the player to notice, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Also, if the presentation mode after the switch is not suitable for the hold notice performance being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the performance; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

The likelihood of the hold notice effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the probability of winning change when the presentation mode is switched, so the difference in presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the change is limited to appearance, such as changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, if the presentation mode is switched while the pending notice presentation is being executed, there is a risk that the expectation level suggested by the pending notice presentation will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the pending notice presentation in the switched presentation mode will differ from the result of the actual hit/miss judgment that is notified, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying this embodiment (a configuration that restricts the switching of presentation modes when the pending notice presentation is being executed) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player from having an unpleasant impression.

Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the hold notice presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to presentation mode B when the hold notice presentation is being executed in presentation mode A.

In cases where the likelihood of a hold notice effect being executed in presentation mode B is lower than that in presentation mode A, there is a concern that switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice effect is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, causing the player to be presented with a higher expectation level than in reality. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold notice effect is more likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the hold notice effect is relatively low) to presentation mode B, in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the switch is restricted if the hold notice effect is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent a higher expectation level being suggested than in reality.

When a reserved notice performance is being performed in performance mode A, switching to performance mode B is generally restricted, but if the reserved notice performance and the reserved pre-read result that triggered it are a jackpot result, switching to performance mode B is exceptionally permitted.

In this case, even though the situation does not normally involve a change in presentation mode, the change occurs, which breaks the rules from the player's perspective and can suggest a jackpot. In other words, it becomes possible to use the change in presentation mode as one of the presentations that suggests the level of expectation.

If the conditions for switching to presentation mode A are met while a hold notice presentation is being performed in presentation mode B, whether or not to restrict switching to presentation mode A varies depending on the type of specific display mode when the switching conditions are met.

If the system is configured to uniformly restrict the switching of presentation modes when a hold notice performance is being executed, there is a risk that the switching of presentation modes may be excessively restricted or the frequency with which the hold notice performance is executed may be reduced, which may undermine the significance of providing multiple types of presentation modes or the significance of having a function to execute the hold notice performance. In this regard, in the present configuration, when switching from presentation mode B, which corresponds to a high expectation level corresponding to the hold notice performance, to presentation mode A, which corresponds to a low expectation level corresponding to the hold notice performance, the mode switching restrictions are relaxed, and switching is permitted on the condition that the specific display mode when the switching condition is met is equal to or less than a specified mode (green display mode HMc). This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching presentation modes or the execution of the hold notice performance, and makes it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted when the performance mode is switched. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 99. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, a switching guide notification is given during the effective switching period of the presentation mode, and if the player operates the presentation operation unit 36 while this notification is being given, the presentation mode is switched from the next game round. Here, an example of such a mode switch is described.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), during a given game round during the effective period for switching the presentation mode, a switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 as a switching guide notification. This switching guide image 451 is displayed for a given period (for example, the period until the end of that game round).

Figure 95 (a) shows a display example of the switching guide image 451 in which a text display such as "Press the effect button to switch the effect mode" is displayed as a caption above the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Note that the switching guide notification is not limited to this, and may also be a window with the above text display displayed, or a specific light-emitting element corresponding to the switching guide being illuminated. Also, the notification is not necessarily limited to a visual notification, and may be an audio guide using the speaker unit 29.

In such a state, when the player performs a specified operation on the presentation operation unit 36, a switch standby notification is issued. The switch standby notification notifies the player that a switch of presentation modes is on standby. The specific form of the switch standby notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b), a switch standby image 452 with text such as "Preparing for mode change" is displayed on the display screen G.

When the game round in which the waiting-for-switch image 452 is displayed ends and the game moves to the next round, the waiting-for-switch image 452 disappears and the presentation mode changes, as shown in FIG. 95(c).

In addition, if the player does not operate the presentation operation unit 36 during the display period of the switching guide image 451 in FIG. 95(a), the presentation mode will not be switched and the current presentation mode will be maintained even when moving on to the next game round.

The presentation modes include presentation mode A and presentation mode B, which, like the first embodiment, differ in the frequency with which the on-hold notice presentation occurs. Specifically, presentation mode A is configured to function as a mode in which the on-hold notice presentation is likely to be executed and the presentation is easy to enjoy, while presentation mode B is configured to function as a mode in which the on-hold notice presentation is unlikely to be executed, but which has a high probability of winning if it is executed.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The presentation mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 96. This process is executed in step S1307 of the presentation setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed instead of the presentation mode switching process of Fig. 42.

First, in step S8101, it is determined whether or not the presentation mode switching is in an effective period. In this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, a period during which a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state in which a presentation that spans multiple game rounds, such as continuous presentations, is not being performed) is set as the effective period for switching the presentation mode. If the presentation mode switching is not in an effective period, the presentation mode switching process is terminated to maintain the current presentation mode.

If it is during the valid period for switching the presentation mode, the process proceeds to step S8102, where it is determined whether or not a switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The switching standby flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a mode switching is in a standby state, in other words, that the presentation mode will be switched later.

If the switch standby flag is not stored, i.e., if the mode is not in standby for switching, the process proceeds to step S8103, where it is determined whether or not a guidance display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The guidance notification flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, i.e., if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S8104, where it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the lottery for executing the switching guidance notification. The lottery for executing the switching guidance notification is a process of drawing lots to determine whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. The lottery timing for the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the start timing of a game round is set as the lottery timing. If it is not time to draw lots, the process for switching presentation modes is terminated.

If it is time for a lottery, the process proceeds to step S8105, where a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. In this step, the lottery is held based on the lottery counter (random number) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guidance lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In step S8106, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step S8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S8107, and the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guide image 451 as a switching guide notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guide image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step S8108, a notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in the above step S8103 (if the guidance notification flag is stored), i.e., if a switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S8109, where it is judged whether or not a predetermined operation for switching the presentation mode has been performed on the presentation operation unit 36. If a predetermined operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S8110, where the guidance notification flag stored in the above various flag storage area 344d is erased.

In step S8111, a switch standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. This causes a transition to a standby state for mode switching. In step S8112, the display control device 350 is controlled to display a switch standby image 452 as a switch standby notification. Specifically, a command to display the switch standby image 452 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. This causes the switch standby image 452 to be displayed on the display screen G. After step S8112 is executed, the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S8109 (the specified operation has not been performed), the process proceeds to step S8113, where it is judged whether the display period of the switching guide image 451 (notification period of the switching guide notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the process for switching the presentation mode is terminated so that the display of the switching guide image 451 continues.

If the display period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S8114, where the notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. This ends the period during which the presentation mode switching operation is accepted. Also, in step S8114, the display control device 350 is controlled to erase the switching guide image 451. After step S8114 is executed, the presentation mode switching process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S8102 above (if the switching standby flag is stored), i.e., if the game is in a standby state for mode switching, the program proceeds to step S8115, where it is judged whether or not it is time to switch modes. The timing for switching presentation modes is not particularly limited as long as it is a timing after transition to a standby state, but in this embodiment, the above switching timing is set to the start timing of the next game round that is performed after the end of the game round in which the switching operation was performed. If it is not the timing to switch, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated to continue the standby state for mode switching.

If it is time to switch, the process proceeds to step S8116, where the switch standby flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. This ends the standby state for mode switching. In step S8117, a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B.

In step S8118, the presentation mode flag corresponding to the presentation mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In step S8119, the second setting process for the hold notice is executed, and then the process for switching presentation modes is terminated. The second setting process for the hold notice is for setting the execution of the hold notice presentation for the hold information that occurs during the waiting period for switching modes. The details of this setting process will be described later.

<Pending command processing>
The hold command response process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of Fig. 97. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step S1302 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30)), and is executed instead of the hold command response process of Fig. 31. In Fig. 97, the same processes as those in Fig. 31 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S8201, where it is determined whether or not a switch standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If the switch standby flag is not stored, i.e., if the game is not in a standby state for mode switching, the process proceeds to step S1403, where a setting process for hold notice (Figure 34) is executed. In the setting process for hold notice, settings are made to execute a hold notice performance for the generated hold information.

If the switch standby flag is stored (the device is in a standby state for mode switching), the process proceeds to step S8202, and the display mode of the on-hold image corresponding to the generated on-hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, in this embodiment, if new on-hold information occurs during the standby period for mode switching, the execution of the on-hold preview performance triggered by that on-hold information is restricted.

The read-ahead of this reserved information is performed by the reserved read-ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control unit 162, in the same way as other reserved information. Therefore, the performance control unit 143 does not execute the setting process for the reserved notice in step S1403, and the display mode of the reserved image is forcibly set to the normal display mode HMa, but the read-ahead results such as the change pattern are in a state obtained by the reserved command from the main control unit 162.

In step S8203, information generated during standby indicating that the pending information occurred during the standby period is stored in correspondence with the pending information that occurred. This process is performed, for example, by storing the information generated during standby in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the information generated during standby is shifted to the lower area in association with the pending information (variation pattern information, etc.). This makes it possible to know which pending image occurred during the standby period even if the display area of the pending image is shifted by the shift process. Note that the information generated during standby may be stored in a memory area other than the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344, as long as it is possible to recognize which pending information is the target.

After execution of step S8203, in step S1405, processing is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S8202, the hold image of hold information generated during the waiting period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice in step S8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 98. The second setting process for the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching.

First, in step S8301, the pending information that occurred during the standby period for mode switching is identified. That is, based on the information generated during standby, it is determined which pending information that exists at that time occurred during the standby period.

After executing the process of step S8301, the process from step S8302 onwards is executed for the pending calls that occurred during the identified waiting period. Note that since most of the processes from step S8302 onwards are similar to the processes in the setting process for pending notice (Figure 34), the explanation of the common processes will be simplified and the different processes will be explained in detail.

In steps S8302 to S8304, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the pattern of changes in pending occurrences during the waiting period, and whether or not a jackpot has been won. In step S8305, the presentation mode after the switch is determined. For example, if the current mode switch is from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, presentation mode B is determined as the presentation mode after the switch.

In steps S8306 to S8308, a hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the switched-over presentation mode identified in step S8305 is obtained, and a lottery is held to execute the hold notice presentation. If the execution lottery is won, in steps S8309 to S8314, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice presentation is determined, and the presentation scenario is determined. At that time, if different tables are set for each presentation mode as the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode, or the presentation scenario lottery table for drawing the presentation scenario, the table corresponding to the switched-over presentation mode identified in step S8305 is obtained, and a lottery is held.

In this embodiment, for pending information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching, a pending notice performance is set (a display mode setting process based on the results of advance reading) when the standby state is released. At that time, although the pending information that occurs during the standby period occurred during the performance mode before the switch, the lottery for the execution of the pending notice performance and the lottery for the final display mode are performed according to the conditions set for the performance mode after the switch, and are performed in accordance with the performance mode after the switch.

In step S8315, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this manner, a process is executed to change the display mode of the hold notice to a specific display mode in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) or in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1807 in the special chart change display process (FIG. 41). In other words, the hold notice performance for hold information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching is performed after the performance mode is switched.

<Display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The display mode of the reserved image when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Fig. 95 and Fig. 99. Here, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described as an example.

If the execution lottery for the switching guide notification is won during the valid switching period of the mode switching, a switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, as shown in FIG. 95(a). When the player performs a mode switching operation using the performance operation unit 36 in this state, the game moves to a standby state for mode switching (a state in which the player is aware that a mode switch will occur later), and a switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G, as shown in FIG. 99(a). The standby state for mode switching ends when the mode switching timing occurs (the start timing of the next game round).

If two new pieces of pending information occur during the standby period, the main control device 162 executes the pending read-ahead process (step S305) in the same way as for pending information that occurs outside the standby period, and reads ahead the change patterns, etc., for each piece of pending information. In addition, the performance control device 143 does not execute the setting process for the pending notice (step S1403) for each piece of pending information, and sets the display mode of the corresponding pending images HW1, HW2 to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the hold images HW1, HW2 in the normal display mode HMa are displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 and the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga. The state in which the display mode of the hold images HW1, HW2 is the normal display mode HMa continues at least until the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing occurs with the start of the next game round, the standby state for mode switching ends, and the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, as shown in FIG. 99(c). At this time, the presentation control device 143 executes the second setting process for the hold notice (step S8119) for the hold information (hold images HW1, HW2) that occurred during the standby period.

In the second setting process for the hold notice, various selections are made to execute the hold notice performance (selection of the execution of the hold notice performance, selection of the final display mode, selection of the performance scenario, etc.) based on the results of the hold pre-reading process executed when the hold information was acquired. At that time, for these selections, a selection table set for the performance mode B, which is the performance mode after switching, is used.

If the result of the second setting process for the hold notice is that the hold notice performance will not be executed for the hold image HW1, and the hold image HW2 will be changed to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, then as shown in FIG. 99(d), when the hold image HW2 is shifted from the second unit hold display area Ga2 to the first unit hold display area Ga1, its display mode will be changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. In other words, the hold notice performance triggered by the hold information generated during the waiting period for the mode change will be executed after the mode change.

In addition, there may be cases where a lottery for executing a switching notification notification is won while the hold notice performance is being executed, and switching notification image 451 (Figure 95 (a)) is displayed while the hold notice performance is being executed. In this case, the hold notice performance is not subject to the execution restriction, and the system transitions to a standby state with the hold notice performance continuing.

In addition, hold information may occur between the time when the switching guide image 451 is displayed and the time when the switching operation is performed (before the transition to the standby state), and the hold information may trigger the execution of a hold notice performance. In other words, the standby state may be transitioned to with the hold image of the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed in a specific display mode. In this case, the hold notice performance is not subject to the execution restriction, and the standby state is transitioned to with the hold notice performance continuing.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the conditions for switching the presentation mode are met and the game moves to a standby state, and then when the timing for switching arrives, the presentation mode is switched. During the standby state, the game is configured to restrict the execution of the hold preview presentation, which sets the display mode of the hold image to a specific display mode.

In this embodiment, a hold preview performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold pre-read process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, because the mode is switched between performance mode A and performance mode B, the player's mood can be changed during play, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In this configuration, for example, if the performance mode is switched while the hold preview performance is being executed, there is a concern that the player's attention to the hold preview performance will decrease due to the distraction of the change in performance mode, or conversely, the player may be so focused on the hold preview performance that the performance mode will change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, when it is known that the presentation mode will be switched later (standby state for mode switching), the execution of the hold notice presentation is restricted, so that the presentation mode can be prevented from switching while the hold notice presentation is being executed. This allows the execution of the hold notice presentation and the switching of presentation modes to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for the player to notice, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Also, if the presentation mode after the switch is not suitable for the currently executing hold notice presentation, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden at the time of design.

The system is designed to restrict the execution of the hold notification effect based on hold information acquired during standby mode.

The above configuration broadens the range of special states that are subject to the restriction of the hold notice performance, and prevents excessive restriction of the execution of the hold notice performance. In particular, if the execution restriction of the hold notice performance is applied to the hold information acquired during the period from the display of the switching guide image 451 until the transition to the standby state, the execution of the hold notice performance will be restricted even for hold information acquired in a situation where it is uncertain whether the performance mode will actually be switched. In this case, if the player does not perform the switching operation and the performance mode is not switched, the execution of the hold notice performance will be restricted for hold information that did not need to be restricted, but with this configuration, it is possible to prevent such unnecessary restrictions.

The system is designed to restrict the execution of the hold preview performance regardless of the results of the hold pre-read process.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the hold preview performance regardless of the result of the hold preview processing. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the performance mode from switching while the hold preview performance is being executed. In addition, since the execution restriction of the hold preview performance is not affected by the result of the hold preview processing, the hold preview processing can be carried out in the same way as when the device is not in a standby state (during the hold preview performance restriction period) even in a standby state. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the hold preview processing, it is possible to restrict the execution of the hold preview performance in a standby state while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The likelihood of the hold notice effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the probability of winning change when the presentation mode is switched, so the difference in presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the change is limited to appearance, such as changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, if the presentation mode is switched while the reserved notice presentation is being executed, there is a risk that the expectation level suggested by the reserved notice presentation will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the reserved notice presentation in the presentation mode after the switch will differ from the result of the actual hit/miss judgment that is notified, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying this embodiment (a configuration that limits the execution of the reserved notice presentation when the presentation mode is in a standby state in which preparations are being made to switch) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player from having an unpleasant impression.

Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the hold notice presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to presentation mode B when the hold notice presentation is being executed in presentation mode A.

In the case where the likelihood of the hold notice performance in presentation mode B is lower than that in presentation mode A, there is a concern that switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, and present a higher expectation level to the player than in reality. In this regard, in this configuration, when switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold notice performance is more likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the hold notice performance is relatively low) to presentation mode B, in which the hold notice performance is less likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted if preparations are underway to switch to that mode. This prevents switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent the suggestion of a higher expectation level than in reality.

The system is configured so that the on-hold preview performance corresponding to the on-hold information acquired during the standby state is executed after switching the performance mode. This prevents the execution of the on-hold preview performance from being restricted for the on-hold information acquired during the standby state, preventing the expectation level indication from being impossible.

In the above case, the hold notice performance after the mode switch is configured to be executed based on the results of the hold look-ahead process performed during the standby state (the hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired). In this case, it is possible to execute the hold notice performance corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state without having to execute the hold look-ahead process again after the performance mode is switched. This allows the existing configuration for the hold look-ahead process of the main control unit 162 to be used as is, and prevents the configuration from becoming complicated.

The system is configured to hold a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice performance after switching the performance mode based on the hold information acquired during the standby state, and to apply the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) for the execution lottery that correspond to the performance mode after the switch.

In the above configuration, when a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice performance after a performance mode change, the lottery conditions applied are those set in accordance with the performance mode after the change, rather than the lottery conditions when the target hold information was acquired (lottery conditions set in accordance with the performance mode before the change). This makes it possible to execute a hold notice performance in accordance with the performance mode after the change, even if the hold information was acquired during a standby state (before the performance mode was changed).

When pending information is acquired during a standby state, information generated during standby indicating that the pending information was acquired during a standby state is stored in the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know after the standby state that the pending information was acquired during the standby state based on the information generated during standby stored in the hold memory area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if the pending information acquired before the standby state and the pending information acquired during the standby state are mixed after the standby state ends, it is possible to easily identify the pending information acquired during the standby state. As a result, when executing the hold notification performance after the mode is switched, it is possible to distinguish between the pending information acquired during the standby state and the pending information that was not, and to process only the pending information acquired during the standby state.

<Other embodiments>
The above-described embodiments and modified examples are not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments in combination in part or in whole. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but it may be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but it may not be differentiated. Also, the reserved information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is given priority in determining whether or not a win has been made over the reserved information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62, but the relationship may be reversed, or the determination may be made in the order of winning entries.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, only game balls flowing down the right route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63, but only game balls flowing down the left route can pass through or win, or game balls can pass through or win from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down either the right route or the left route can win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route or the left route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, a hold image is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to notify the player of the number of holds, but the hold image may be displayed on a display unit other than the pattern display device 75, or hold lamp units (light-emitting units) provided in a number corresponding to the upper limit memory number may be illuminated to notify the number of holds based on the number of illuminated hold lamp units. When the hold lamp units are illuminated, a hold notice performance can be performed by changing the light-emitting state (e.g., light-emitting color) to a specific light-emitting state different from the normal light-emitting state based on the result of the hold look-ahead process.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the result of the win/lose judgment is a jackpot result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game (open/close execution mode). However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the result of the win/lose judgment is a small win result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during the small win game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award judgment is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, in the present invention, "the player can be granted a privilege based on the fact that a bonus corresponding result has been achieved" and "the player is transitioned to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a bonus corresponding result has been achieved" can be understood to also include the case where the result of the win/loss determination is a small win result and transitions to a big win game state via a V win, as described above.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, a hold preview effect was executed as a specific notification in which the display mode of the hold image was changed to a specific display mode. However, instead of a hold preview effect using a hold image, the configuration of each embodiment may be applied to a play round effect (so-called continuous preview effect or look-ahead zone effect) that is executed over multiple play rounds based on the results of the hold look-ahead process.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, a specific notification is executed as a performance that spans multiple game rounds, but the specific notification does not necessarily have to span multiple game rounds and may be performed within a single game round. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, this is because it is expected that the performance mode will be switched multiple times during a game round. In this case, the performance performed within that single game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the reserved read-ahead process, and may be based on the result of a win/lose determination performed at the start of that game round, etc.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the patterns displayed variably on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll in the left-right direction, but the patterns may be displayed lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be displayed variably by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scrolling direction are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of pattern rows) is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, an execution display area D is provided to notify the player that a reserved play has been completed, but the configuration may not include the execution display area D.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when a hold notice performance is executed, the performance scenario is set to include the notification period in the execution display area D. However, the performance scenario may be set for the period before the target hold image HW is displayed in the execution display area D (the period during which the play turn of the target hold image HW is on hold).

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when executing a hold notice performance, the settings are made in stages, such as by determining the final display mode of the hold image and then setting the performance scenario. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the final display mode and performance scenario are set in a single process. For example, a configuration may also be adopted in which both the final display mode and the performance scenario are determined by a single table.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, information on the fluctuation pattern is transmitted when the result of the hold-ahead read process executed by the main control unit 162 is notified to the performance control unit 143. However, in order to prevent the data volume of the transmission command from becoming large, it is also possible to transmit predetermined information with a smaller data volume than the fluctuation pattern (such as an identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern or rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation). This also applies to the power recovery hold command etc. in the sixth embodiment above.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the game round presentation (presentation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game round presentation may be determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the reserved read-ahead process, but the presentation control device 143 executes the reserved read-ahead process (a process of reading ahead the result of the win/lose judgment and the game round presentation) based on the reserved command from the main control device 162 (information indicating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1).

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the mode of the hold notice presentation (display mode of the hold image) is set based on the fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-reading process, but the presentation control device 143 may be configured to pre-read the presentation pattern (play round presentation) based on the information on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-reading process) sent from the main control device 162, and set the mode of the hold notice presentation based on the result. This type of configuration is particularly effective, for example, when multiple types of presentation patterns (play round presentations) correspond to one fluctuation pattern.

(15) In the first to fourth and sixth to ninth embodiments, the reserved read-ahead process is performed by the main control device 162, but it may be performed by the performance control device 143 or the display control device 350. When the reserved read-ahead process is performed by the performance control device 143, as in the fifth embodiment, information corresponding to the values (obtained random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS may be transmitted from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 may read in advance the results of the hit/miss determination and the lottery results of the variation pattern. Also, in the fifth embodiment, at least one of the first reserved read-ahead process and the second reserved read-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162.

(16) In the above first to fifth embodiments, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode before being promoted to a higher-level display mode, but it may be configured to promote to a higher-level display mode without restoring to the original specific display mode. Also, it may be configured in such a way that both the case of restoring to the original specific display mode before being promoted to a higher-level display mode and the case of promoting to a higher-level display mode without restoring to the original specific display mode can occur.

(17) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be restored in stages. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a gradual restoration does not occur. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is uniformly restored to the original specific display mode with a single change.

(18) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the return scenario is set to include the display period in the execution display area D. However, the return scenario may be set to include only the display period in the first pending display area Ga or the second pending display area Gb (without including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the promotion process of the target reserved image HW may not be executed.

(20) In the first to fifth embodiments, the target reserved image HW is restored to the original specific display mode during the period (reserved period) during which it is displayed in the first reserved display area Ga or the second reserved display area Gb, and is then promoted to a higher display mode during the play round of the target reserved image HW. However, it is not necessary to wait until the play round of the target reserved image HW before promotion, and the promotion may be performed during the reserved period. When the promotion process is performed before the play round starts, it is advisable to refer to the result of the reserved pre-read process performed on the target reserved image HW (reserved information) instead of the fluctuation start command sent from the main control device 162 at the start of the fluctuation.

(21) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when the target reserved image HW is promoted to a higher display state during a play round, the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the change is referenced. However, the promotion may be performed based on the results of a reserved read-ahead process performed on the target reserved image HW (reserved information).

(22) In the first to third embodiments described above, the presentation mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but as in the eighth embodiment described above, the presentation mode may be switched automatically without the player's operation.

(23) In the first to third embodiments described above, the presentation mode is switched during a game round, but the presentation mode may be switched via the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game). For example, the configurations according to the first to third embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which multiple presentation modes are set as presentation modes for a high probability game state, and the player can select which presentation mode to play in the immediately preceding opening and closing execution mode.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the following configuration can be used. In the presentation mode A during the high probability game state, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to a specific display mode, and when a guaranteed jackpot occurs in the game of the reserved information before the target reserved image HW and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and a presentation mode B different from the presentation mode A is selected during the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa in the presentation mode B (high probability game state) after the opening and closing execution mode. Then, when a guaranteed jackpot occurs again in the game of the reserved information before the target reserved image HW and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and a presentation mode A is selected during the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the original specific display mode in the presentation mode A (high probability game state) after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, in the above configuration, the presentation mode does not necessarily have to be switched by the player's operation (manually), but may be switched automatically without the player's operation.

(24) In the first to third embodiments described above, the likelihood (probability) of the hold notice performance being executed is different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. However, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed may be the same in these presentation modes.

(25) In the first to third embodiments, the configuration has two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the multiple types of presentation states, but a configuration with three or more types of presentation modes may be used. In this case, for example, in a configuration with presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the hold notice presentation may be less likely to be executed in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, and the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be different in each presentation mode, or the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be the same for all presentation modes A to C, or a configuration may be used in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, such as presentation modes A and C having the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation, but presentation mode B being less likely to execute the hold notice presentation.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation are mixed with presentation modes with different ease of execution, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, just as when switching between different presentation modes. In other words, the configuration may be such that no distinction is made between switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution and switching between different presentation modes.

In addition, when switching between presentation modes that have the same ease of execution, unlike when switching between different presentation modes, the display mode may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa even when the presentation mode is switched, but the specific display mode before the mode switch may be maintained. In other words, a distinction may be made between switching between presentation modes that have the same ease of execution and switching between different presentation modes, and the handling of the hold notice presentation may be different between the two.

(26) In the first to third embodiments described above, the hold notice performance can be executed in performance mode B, in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but the hold notice performance may not be executed in performance mode B. In other words, the "performance state in which a specific notification is unlikely to be executed" of the present invention can be understood to include not only performance modes in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but also performance modes in which the hold notice performance is not executed.

(27) In the first to third embodiments described above, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed in the hold notice performance in the performance modes A and B is differentiated by varying the probability of execution of the hold notice performance when the hold information corresponds to a miss. However, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed in the performance modes may be differentiated by varying the probability of execution of the hold notice performance when the hold information corresponds to a jackpot, or by varying the probability of execution in both the cases corresponding to a miss and the case corresponding to a hit.

(28) In the first to third embodiments described above, when the presentation mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice presentation, the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is also changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb may be distinguished from the execution display area D, and the hold image displayed in the execution display area D may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa.

(29) In the first to third embodiments described above, the execution of a change suggestion effect is restricted when the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, but a configuration in which a dedicated effect (different from the change suggestion effect) corresponding to the restoration may be executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to distinguish between a case in which the display mode of the reserved image is simply changed to a higher display mode and a case in which the reserved image is restored to the original specific display mode as a result of the restoration process.

(30) In the first embodiment described above, when the display mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is being executed, and then switched back to presentation mode A (when the display mode returns to the original presentation mode in which the hold notice performance was being executed), the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, for example, in a configuration having presentation modes A to C as presentation modes, when the display mode is switched to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is being executed in presentation mode A, and the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the display mode is switched to presentation mode C (a presentation mode different from presentation mode A) before the end of the play round of the target hold image HW, the display mode may be restored to the original specific display mode.

In the above case, it is preferable that the ease with which the hold notice performance is executed is the same in presentation mode A and presentation mode C, or that presentation mode C is a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed more easily than presentation mode A (lower expectations for the hold notice performance). However, this is not limited to this, and presentation mode C may be configured to be less likely to execute the hold notice performance than presentation mode A. In this case, presentation mode C may be a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed more easily than presentation mode B, or a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed less easily, or a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed with the same ease as presentation mode B. Also, a configuration in which the ease with which the hold notice performance is executed may be the same in presentation mode A, presentation mode B, and presentation mode C.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa in both cases where the display mode is switched from A to B during execution of the hold notice performance, and where the display mode is switched from B to A during execution of the hold notice performance. However, in the latter case, i.e., where the display mode is switched from a high expectation display mode corresponding to the hold notice performance to a low expectation display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched from A to B during execution of the hold notice presentation, and then switched back to A before the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation ends, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be restored to the original specific display mode when the presentation mode is switched to A before the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation starts. In other words, when the presentation mode is switched to A after the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation starts, the display mode of the target hold image HW may not be restored to the original specific display mode.

(33) In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched from A to B during the execution of the hold notice performance, and new hold information occurs while the player is in presentation mode B, the hold notice performance triggered by the hold information is not executed in presentation mode B. However, a lottery for executing the hold notice performance may be held under conditions set in accordance with presentation mode B, and the hold notice performance may be executed if the player wins the lottery.

However, while the reserved image that was in a specific display mode in presentation mode A before switching to presentation mode B is changed to the normal display mode HMa when presentation mode B is switched to, if a reserved notice presentation is performed for the reserved information generated in presentation mode B, there is a concern that this will further increase the player's anxiety that a jackpot or even the level of expectation for the reserved image (reserved information) that was in the normal display mode HMa may have been lost. In addition, if presentation mode A is switched back to while a reserved notice presentation started in presentation mode B is being performed, the question arises as to how to handle the reserved notice presentation, and there is a concern that the overall processing may become more complicated.

In that sense, as in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the hold notice performance for newly generated hold information while remaining in presentation mode B (in other words, while waiting for the restoration process to restore the display mode of the target hold image HW, which was set to a specific display mode in the previous presentation mode A, to its original display mode). Note that, in a case where the presentation mode is switched from A to B when the hold notice performance is not being executed, it is not necessary to restrict the execution of the hold notice performance triggered by the newly generated hold information in presentation mode B.

(34) In the first embodiment described above, the number of pending items including the current pending information is determined in step S1508, but the number of pending items may be determined for pending items prior to the current pending information.

(35) In the second embodiment described above, the target pending images HB1 and HB2 in the restricted state (pending images of pending information generated during the restricted state) are in the normal display mode HMa, but they may be configured to be in a predetermined display mode (e.g., a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the pending notice performance is in a restricted state, in other words, it is possible to inform the player that there is a possibility that the display mode will be changed to the specific display mode when the restricted state ends.

(36) In the second embodiment described above, when the display mode is switched from A to B during execution of the hold notice display, i.e., when the hold notice display transitions to a restricted state, a notification corresponding to the restricted state and different from the hold image (for example, a predetermined display informing the user that the display is in a restricted state) may be provided.

(37) In the second embodiment described above, the display of pending images may be disabled during the restricted state. More specifically, the display may be disabled not only for pending image HA that is set to a specific display mode in presentation mode A and pending images HB1 and HB2 of pending information generated in presentation mode B, but also for all pending images, including other pending images.

In this case, in order to prevent the player from losing track of the number of reserved balls, the number of reserved balls may be notified by a separate display such as a number display (a separate display of the number of reserved balls from the image for reserved balls). However, since it may be difficult for the player to understand if the display suddenly switches to the above-mentioned separate display, it is preferable to, for example, notify the number of reserved balls by both the image for reserved balls and a separate display such as a number display, and if the display mode switches from A to B during the execution of the reserved notice, only the display of the image for reserved balls is erased in B. In this case, it is preferable not to change the location of the separate display in order to prevent the player from losing track of the separate display.

(38) In the second embodiment described above, the mode of the hold notice presentation triggered by hold information generated during the restricted state is configured to be set at the end of the restricted period (step S2702), but it may be set during the restricted period or after the end of the restricted period.

(39) In the second embodiment described above, when pending information is acquired during the restricted state, the pending read-ahead process is executed, and after the restricted state ends, the display mode of the target pending images HB1, HB2 is set based on the result of the pending read-ahead process executed during the restricted state. However, the pending read-ahead process for the pending information acquired during the restricted state may be executed after the restricted state, and the display mode of the target pending images HB1, HB2 after the restricted state may be set based on the result. In this case, the pending read-ahead process may be executed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. In addition, the pending read-ahead process may be not executed when pending information is acquired during the restricted state, or may be executed.

(40) In the third embodiment, when the presentation mode A is switched to the presentation mode B during the execution of the hold notice presentation, the presentation mode B is configured to have the same display mode as that in the presentation mode A. However, in cases where the notification mode of the hold image is different between the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B, it is not necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the display mode may be changed to a display mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank. For example, in the presentation mode A, the display modes are ranked in the order of blue display mode HMb < green display mode HMc < red display mode HMd < rainbow display mode HMe, while in the presentation mode B, the display mode is ranked in the order of yellow display mode < brown display mode < purple display mode < rainbow display mode. In this case, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the presentation mode A is switched to the presentation mode B, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the presentation mode B may be configured to be the brown display mode.

In addition, in a gaming machine that indicates the level of expectation by changing the reserved image to a specified character image, in a configuration in which the costume, pose, expression, etc. of the character are set to differ depending on the presentation mode, if presentation mode A is switched to presentation mode B while the target reserved image HW has been changed to a character image with a costume, etc. corresponding to presentation mode A (a state in which the reserved notice presentation is being executed), in presentation mode B, the target reserved image HW may be restored to the same character image as in presentation mode A, while the costume, etc. may correspond to presentation mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the display mode of the target reserved image HW in presentation mode B can be recognized by the player as being of the same rank as the display mode in presentation mode A. This also applies to the case where the display mode of the target reserved image HW is promoted to a higher-ranking display mode in presentation mode B. In other words, it is sufficient that the display mode can be recognized as a higher-ranking display mode from the player's perspective. In the above example, the display mode of the target reserved image HW would first be a brown display mode, and then promoted to a purple display mode.

In addition, the configuration in the first and second embodiments above, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored to the original specific display mode when returning to the original presentation mode A; the configuration in the fourth embodiment above, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode are the same; the configuration in the fifth embodiment above, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode when the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-reading process; and the configuration in the sixth embodiment above, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored to the same specific display mode as the display mode at the time of power outage, are also specific examples of restoring the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a display mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank.

(41) In the above third embodiment, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during execution of the hold notice presentation, the display mode of the target hold image HW is temporarily changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, it may be configured not to change to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, when the determination result is that the same display mode is to be displayed in presentation mode B (when a positive determination is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target hold image HW may be configured to be the same display mode without changing it to the normal display mode HMa (without executing the processing of step S3110).

(42) In the third embodiment described above, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank will not be displayed in presentation mode B (when a negative determination is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, but it may be set to a specific display mode within a range that does not exceed the actual expectation level. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target pending image HW before the presentation mode switching is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the specific display mode may be set to a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the presentation mode switching).

(43) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the game state includes three types of game states: a normal game state, a high probability game state, and a time-saving game state. However, the game state may include other game states than these three, for example, two types of game states: a normal game state and a high probability game state. In other words, it is sufficient if the game state includes multiple types of game states.

(44) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display of the reserved image is not executed during the opening and closing execution mode, but the reserved image may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image during the opening and closing execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Also, the reserved image may be displayed in a predetermined display mode (e.g., a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, the predetermined display mode may not correspond to the jackpot expectation level of each reserved information (does not suggest the expectation level, etc.).

(45) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display of the reserved image is resumed during the ending period, but the display of the reserved image may be resumed before the beginning of the ending period, or after the ending period ends (for example, when the first play begins after the opening and closing execution mode ends).

(46) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, but it may be configured to display it as a specific display target without changing it to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, it may be configured to resume displaying the reserved image with the display mode of the target reserved image HW changed to the specific display mode.

(47) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the configuration in which the game state (variation pattern table) is changed via the opening/closing execution mode in which multiple rounds of play are executed is exemplified as an applicable configuration, but the present invention can also be applied to a configuration in which the variation pattern table is changed via a small win game (opening/closing execution mode in which one round of play is executed). Note that the change in the variation pattern table is not limited to being triggered by the result of a win/loss determination being a win result or the opening/closing execution mode (a game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed) being executed, but may also be based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, such as the number of play times in which the result of a win/loss determination was a loss reaching a predetermined number.

(48) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the game state is changed by the open/close execution mode as an example of a configuration in which a difference occurs in the results obtained by the lottery even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS are the same. However, the difference may be caused by an event other than the open/close execution mode. Such an event may be, for example, a predetermined number of game plays resulting in a loss or winning a lottery. In other words, the trigger may be anything, and it is sufficient that the occurrence of some event results in the difference. Furthermore, the difference is not limited to a change in the game state, and may be caused by, for example, a change in the presentation state that does not involve a change in the jackpot probability.

(49) In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is stored when the opening and closing execution mode is started, but the timing of storing the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, the display mode may be stored at the time of a winning game that triggers the opening and closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the reserved image is configured to be gradually increased in the reserved preview performance, there is a possibility that the display mode of the reserved image will change during the execution of a winning play round, so it is preferable to store the display mode after the display mode is confirmed, in other words, after the change in the display mode is restricted. Specifically, it is preferable to store the display mode when the open/close execution mode is started (when the winning play round ends) as in the fourth embodiment above.

(50) In the fourth embodiment described above, the return judgment and return process setting (step S3416) are performed during the ending period, but these processes may be performed after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Also, they may be performed after the opening and closing execution mode starts and before the ending period starts.

When performing the above processes during the open/close execution mode, it is advisable to perform them during periods when the variable winning device 65 is closed, such as the opening period, ending period, and round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is open during the open/close execution mode, it is expected that the processing load will be relatively high, such as the need to perform processing to perform a winning performance based on the occurrence of a win in the variable winning device 65. If such a period is used to perform the return judgment or return processing, there is a concern that this will result in an even higher load. In this regard, by configuring the above processes to be performed during the period when the variable winning device 65 is closed, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

(51) In the fourth embodiment described above, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability game state, if the result of the reserved pre-reading process is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored. However, regardless of whether the result is a normal jackpot result or a guaranteed jackpot result, if the jackpot result is pre-read by the reserved pre-reading process, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be restored.

(52) In the fifth embodiment described above, the obtained random numbers themselves, such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the variation type counter CS, are transmitted from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143. However, in order to prevent the data volume of the transmission command from becoming too large, it is also possible to transmit predetermined information (such as an identifier corresponding to the random number) having a smaller data volume than the obtained random numbers.

(53) In the fifth embodiment, the second reserved read-ahead process is performed when the opening and closing execution mode ends, but it may be configured to be performed after the opening and closing execution mode ends. It may also be configured to be performed while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, or before the opening and closing execution mode starts (the period from the start of a winning game round to the start of the opening and closing execution mode).

(54) In the fifth embodiment, the first reserved read-ahead process and the second reserved read-ahead process are configured to read in advance the fluctuation pattern, but they may also be configured to read in advance the presentation pattern (play round presentation). This type of configuration is particularly effective when, for example, multiple types of presentation patterns (play round presentations) correspond to one fluctuation pattern.

(55) In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set in the upper limit display mode table in accordance with the fluctuation pattern, but the upper limit display mode may be set in accordance with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

(56) In the above fifth embodiment, even if the obtained win/loss result for the jackpot random number counter C1 varies between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is configured to be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode. However, it may be configured not to be a specific display mode. Specifically, if the result of the first reserved pre-reading process is a jackpot and the result of the second reserved pre-reading process is a miss, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be configured not to be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

(57) In the above fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved read-ahead process, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result of the comparison. However, the above comparison may not be performed (regardless of the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode), and the display mode may be set based on the result of the second reserved read-ahead process.

(58) In the above fifth embodiment, when the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-reading process, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. However, it may be set to a specific display mode within a range that does not exceed the actual expected degree. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-reading process, it may be set to a specific display mode that is lower than the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

(59) In the fifth embodiment, the second reserved read-ahead process is executed regardless of whether the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. However, if the game states are the same, the second reserved read-ahead process may not be executed, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the opening and closing execution mode may be set based on the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode may be set to the same mode as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the display mode may be changed to the normal display mode HMa first and then to the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, or the display may be displayed in the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode from the beginning.

(60) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, a power interruption abnormality is exemplified as a predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality or a vibration sensor abnormality may also be used. In this case, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to an abnormality that causes the game progress to stop, and may also be an abnormality that causes the game progress to continue.

(61) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the display of the hold image is resumed with the target hold image HW in a specific display mode. However, in the initial stage upon power restoration, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be the normal display mode HMa, and then may be changed to the specific display mode that was set based on the display mode before the power outage occurred or the result of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage.

In addition, in the initial stage when power is restored, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be set to a predetermined display target (a display mode dedicated to when power is restored, for example a purple display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode, and then may be changed to a specific display mode set based on the display mode before the power outage occurred or the result of the pending read-ahead process performed before the power outage. In this case, the pending image set to the predetermined display mode may be set to the normal display mode HMa once and then changed to the specific display mode.

(62) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the display of the reserved images is resumed in a state where the screen state of the pattern display device 75 is a recovery waiting screen (a screen displaying text display 461 such as "The screen will return shortly"), but the display of the reserved images may be resumed when the screen is restored (the display of the changing patterns of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is restored) without displaying the reserved images in the recovery waiting screen state. In such a case, the display of the reserved images is resumed in a state where the number of reserved images displayed is updated (each reserved image is shifted downward and the number of reserved images is reduced by one).

The timing of displaying the reserved image may be different depending on whether the power interruption occurs while a game round is not being played or while a game round is being played. Specifically, if the power interruption occurs while a game round is not being played, the display of the reserved image may be resumed when the power-on screen (a screen displaying text such as "Power has been turned on") is displayed, and if the power interruption occurs while a game round is being played, the display of the reserved image may not be displayed while the screen is waiting for recovery, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed when the screen is restored. In other words, if the power interruption occurs while a game round is not being played, the display of the reserved image may be resumed at an earlier timing (shorter time has elapsed since the start of power supply) than if the power interruption occurs while a game round is being played.

(63) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, examples are given of cases where a power interruption occurs during or when a game round is being played, but the present invention can also be applied to cases where a power interruption occurs during the opening and closing execution mode. In such cases, the display of the target reserved image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or the recovery waiting screen state, or the display of the reserved image may be suspended during the period when the subsequent opening and closing execution mode is being performed after power is restored, and the display of the target reserved image may be resumed in time with the start of the first game round after the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, the display of the reserved image may be suspended during the period when the recovery waiting screen state is being performed, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed in time with the screen being restored.

(64) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, the power failure monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191, but it may also be provided in the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, the power failure monitoring unit 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143, or it may be provided in one of the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143, and a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 or a power failure command (a command indicating the occurrence of a power outage) from one control device may be sent to the other control device.

(65) In the sixth to seventh embodiments described above, the process for setting the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored (the process for returning the reserved notice in step S5202 and the process for setting the display mode in step S6204) is executed when power is restored, but it may be executed after power is restored. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing during the period from when power is restored until the start of a play round of the target reserved image HW.

(66) In the sixth embodiment, information indicating the display mode of the target pending image HW is backed up, and after power is restored, the display mode before the power outage is grasped based on that information to set the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored. In the seventh embodiment, information indicating the look-ahead result is backed up, and after power is restored, the look-ahead result before the power outage is grasped based on that information to set the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored. However, the look-ahead process may be executed again after power is restored, and the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored may be set based on the result. In this case, the look-ahead process after power is restored may be performed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143.

In the above case, it is advisable to store change location information that makes it possible to know which hold image is in a specific display mode when multiple hold images are displayed, and to back up (store and retain) the change location information even if a power outage occurs. With this configuration, it becomes possible to know after power is restored which hold image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage occurred. The change location information may be stored in RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or it may be stored in RAM 344 or backup RAM 345 of the performance control device 143 and backed up by the performance control device 143.

In the above case, it is advisable to execute a look-ahead process after power is restored on the reserved images (reserved information) that were understood to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage. In this case, even reserved images that were not in a specific display mode before the power outage are made into a specific display mode by the look-ahead process after power is restored, preventing the player from getting an unnatural impression. Furthermore, compared to performing the look-ahead process again on all reserved information that exists after power is restored, the number of times the look-ahead process is executed can be kept low, making it possible to reduce the processing load when power is restored.

Here, determining which hold images were displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage can be rephrased as determining which hold images were not displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage, and the display mode of hold images determined to not have been displayed in a specific display mode may be set to the normal display mode. In this case, the process may set the display mode of hold images that were not subject to the pre-reading process after power recovery to the normal display mode, or may perform the pre-reading process after power recovery on all hold images, and then for hold images determined to not have been displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode of the images may be forcibly set to the normal display mode regardless of the results of the pre-reading process.

In addition, in a configuration in which the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the results of the pre-read after power is restored, the display mode may be limited to a specific display mode below a certain level (for example, the green display mode HMc or the blue display mode HMb), as in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above.

The read-ahead process after power is restored may be performed when power is restored, or may be performed after power is restored if it is performed before the start of a play round of the reserved image (reserved information) that was in a specific display mode before the power outage.

In addition, the system may be configured to not execute a pre-reading process after power is restored, and to set the display mode of pending images that are understood to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage to a predetermined specific display mode (e.g., the blue display mode HMb).

(67) In the sixth embodiment, a backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (store and hold) information related to images for reservation. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all information stored in RAM 344 is backed up without providing a backup RAM 345. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which only a portion of the information stored in RAM 344 (information related to images for reservation) is backed up without providing a backup RAM 345.

(68) In the sixth embodiment, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is sent to the main control unit 162 and the performance control unit 143, but it may be sent only to the main control unit 162. In such a configuration, when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control unit 162, the main control unit 162 sends a power failure command to the performance control unit 143, and the performance control unit 143 executes power failure processing (such as the processing of steps S11 to S13) in response to receiving the power failure command.

(69) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage is equal to or higher than a specific display mode (green display mode HMc) (if a positive judgment is made in step S5404), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is limited to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa (the specific display mode may be canceled).

(70) In the sixth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the promotion process for the target reserved image HW in the play round is executed when the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power outage (steps S5409, S5601). However, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process for the target reserved image HW in the play round is executed even when the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored is the specific display mode before the power outage. In addition, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process for the play round is executed regardless of the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored.

(71) In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot result is read in advance by the reserved pre-read process before the power outage (when a positive judgment is made in step S6302), the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power recovery is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc). However, it may be configured to be more likely to be set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is read in advance by the reserved pre-read process before the power outage, the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power recovery may be set to the normal display mode HMa or a specific display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and the probability of the first specific display mode being set higher than the probability of these display modes.

In addition, without imposing a restriction such as the first specific display mode, a setting process for the hold notice similar to that before the power outage may be executed based on the grasped hold pre-reading result (the result of the hold pre-reading process executed before the power outage), and a lottery process may be executed for the hold notice performance and the display mode of the hold image.

The same applies when a highly anticipated losing result is predicted (when a positive judgment is made in step S6305).

(72) In the seventh embodiment described above, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored is different depending on whether the pending read-ahead process before the power outage resulted in a jackpot or a miss, but such a distinction may not be made. Specifically, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode regardless of whether the result was a hit or miss.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-read process before the power outage cannot be grasped (if a negative judgment is made in step S6308), the hold image corresponding to that hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa and displayed. However, it may be configured to treat this as an error and not display the hold image. In that case, the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all hold images, including other hold images, may not be displayed.

(74) In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot result is read in advance by the reserved reading process before the power outage (if a positive judgment is made in step S6302), the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power recovery is set to the first specific display mode, but it may also be configured to be set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, if a specific display mode with a higher expectation is set after power recovery based on the fact that the jackpot result was read in advance before the power outage, it is expected that there will be a large impact on the player if an inconsistency occurs between the reserved reading result and the result of the win/loss judgment in the game round due to the influence of a power outage abnormality. In this regard, by temporarily setting the display mode of the reserved image after power recovery to the normal display mode HMa and configuring it to change the display mode based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round, it becomes possible to safely set the display mode of the reserved image after power recovery. The same applies to the case where a loss result with a high expectation is read in advance (if a positive judgment is made in step S6305).

(75) In the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the promotion process is executed in the game round of the target reserved image HW when a jackpot result is predicted by the reserved pre-read process before the power is cut off, or when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss effect of an SPSP reach miss or greater is predicted (steps S6304, S6307). However, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process is executed in the game round of the target reserved image HW when other pre-read results are obtained (such as a reach miss effect of an SP reach miss). Moreover, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process is executed in the game round regardless of the pre-read result.

(76) In the seventh embodiment, not only information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage, but also information corresponding to the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage may be backed up, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery may be set based on both pieces of information. For example, the upper limit of the specific display mode after power recovery (upper limit display mode) may be set to a plurality of types corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and when the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage (backed up specific display mode) is a mode equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read in the hold pre-read process before the power outage (backed up hold pre-read result), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery may be set to the same mode as the specific display mode before the power outage.

(77) In the seventh embodiment, the main control device 162 backs up the information corresponding to the result of the reserved read-ahead processing performed before the power outage. However, the performance control device 143 or the display control device 350 may back up the information. When backing up the information in the performance control device 143, as in the sixth embodiment, the performance control device 143 may be provided with a backup function such as a backup RAM, and the information corresponding to the result of the reserved read-ahead processing transmitted from the main control device 162 may be stored in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. When a power outage occurs, the information may be written to the backup RAM, or the information stored in the RAM 344 may be retained even during the power outage. In this configuration, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the result of the reserved read-ahead processing performed before the power outage can be grasped based on the information retained in the performance control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the reserved read-ahead processing).

In the above case, the information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162 may or may not be backed up. Incidentally, if the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143 are configured to back up information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process, a configuration may be further provided for determining the normality of the information based on the comparison result of each piece of information backed up in both the control devices 162 and 143. Specifically, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process backed up in the main control device 162 is sent to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 compares the information it backs up (information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process) with the information sent from the main control device 162. As a result, if the two pieces of information correspond to each other, the backed up information is determined to be normal, the information is recognized as valid, and is used to set (return) the hold notice performance after power is restored. Conversely, if the two pieces of information do not correspond to each other, the backed up information is determined to be abnormal, and the information is considered invalid and the hold notice performance return process (setting of the hold notice performance using the information) is not executed.

Here, the information transmitted from the main control device 162 corresponds to the information backed up by the performance control device 143 not only when the values of the two pieces of information match, but also when the information itself does not match, such as when the form (e.g., value) of the information at the time of storage is different between the two control devices 162, 143, but the contents of the information are essentially the same.

In addition, the information comparison may be performed not only by the performance control device 143 but also by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. When the comparison is performed by the main control device 162, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the information backed up by the performance control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162.

In addition, the information whose normality is judged by comparing (collating) the results backed up by the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the results of the hold read-ahead process, but may be other information, such as the result of a hit/miss judgment or information about the number of holds. Incidentally, if the information about the number of holds backed up by the main control device 162 does not correspond to the information about the number of holds backed up by the performance control device 143, an error notification may be issued as an abnormality, or alternatively or in addition, the number of holds may be notified based on the information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to the information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In the eighth to ninth embodiments described above, the likelihood (probability) of the hold notice performance being executed is different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. However, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed may be the same in these presentation modes.

(79) In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the hold notice performance can be executed in performance mode B, in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but the hold notice performance may not be executed in performance mode B. In other words, the "performance state in which a specific notification is unlikely to be executed" of the present invention can be understood to include not only performance modes in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but also performance modes in which the hold notice performance is not executed.

(80) In the eighth embodiment, the presentation mode is automatically switched without the player's operation, but the presentation mode may be switched by the player's operation (manual). In this case, it is preferable to disable the operation to switch the presentation mode while the pending preview presentation is being executed.

(81) In the eighth embodiment, the multiple types of presentation states are two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, but three or more types of presentation modes may be provided. In this case, for example, in a configuration with presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the hold notice presentation may be less likely to be executed in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, and the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be different in each presentation mode, or the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be the same for all presentation modes A to C, or a configuration may be used in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, such as presentation modes A and C having the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation, but presentation mode B being less likely to execute the hold notice presentation.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice performance are mixed with presentation modes with different ease of execution, the configuration may be such that switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution is restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed, as is the case with switching between different presentation modes, or in the case of switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, switching between presentation modes may be permitted even while the hold notice performance is being executed.

(82) In the eighth embodiment described above, when the time for switching is reached (when a positive judgment is made in step S7101), a lottery for switching the presentation mode (first mode switching lottery in step S7102) is executed, and if the lottery is won, it is determined whether or not the pending notice presentation is being executed, and if it is being executed, the processing for switching the presentation mode is not executed. However, it may also be configured to determine whether or not the pending notice presentation is being executed when the time for switching is reached (when a positive judgment is made in step S7101), and if it is being executed, the lottery for switching the presentation mode is not executed and the mode switching is not executed.

(83) In the eighth embodiment described above, the switching of presentation modes is restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed, not only from presentation mode A, in which the hold notice performance is likely to be executed, to presentation mode B, in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but also from presentation mode B to presentation mode A. However, the configuration may be such that the switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted even while the hold notice performance is being executed.

(84) In the eighth embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, it is determined whether the display mode of the target hold image HW on which the hold notice presentation is being executed is equal to or greater than a predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc), and whether or not to allow the switching of presentation modes is determined based on the result of the determination. However, as in the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the configuration may be such that the switching of presentation modes is restricted if the hold notice presentation is being executed, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW.

(85) In the eighth embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW, if the hold notice presentation is being executed, the switching of presentation modes is restricted. However, as in the case of switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the configuration may be such that whether or not to permit the switching of presentation modes is determined based on the display mode of the target hold image HW.

In the above case, the specified display mode that is the criterion (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of presentation modes may be a display mode of the same rank as that for switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, or may be a display mode different from that for switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A. If a different display mode is used, it is preferable that it be a display mode of a higher rank than that for switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A.

(86) In the eighth embodiment, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted during execution of the hold notice presentation, the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is maintained in a specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched. In this case, the display mode may be maintained in the normal display mode HMa until a play round of the target hold image HW is started or ended, or, as in the first to third embodiments, the display mode may be changed to the specific display mode before a play round of the target hold image HW is started or ended.

(87) In the eighth embodiment, the switching of presentation modes may be restricted based on the results of the reserved information read-ahead process. For example, when a predetermined result (e.g., a jackpot result or a miss result of an SPSP reach presentation or higher) is read in advance by the reserved information read-ahead process, the switching of presentation modes may be restricted until the play round of the reserved information is completed.

For example, when a high-expectation miss result such as a jackpot result or an SPSP reach effect is predicted, it is expected that a teasing effect such as a preview effect that stirs up the player's anticipation (an effect other than the hold preview effect using a hold image) will be performed before the game round of the reserved information is started. If the performance mode is switched during the execution of the teasing effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand the teasing effect. In this case, if the configuration is such that the switching of the performance mode is restricted based on the result of the hold pre-reading process that triggers the hold preview effect, regardless of whether the hold preview effect is being executed or not, it is possible to suitably prevent the switching of the performance mode during the teasing effect. In addition, since the switching of the performance mode can be restricted before the execution of the hold preview effect, even if the timing of the switching of the performance mode and the start timing of the hold preview effect overlap, it is possible to prevent the switching of the performance mode and the execution of the hold preview effect from being performed simultaneously.

(88) In the eighth embodiment described above, when the condition for switching the presentation mode is met while the hold notice performance is being executed (when the timing for switching the presentation mode is reached and the first mode switching lottery is won), the presentation mode is allowed to be switched if the result of the pre-reading of the hold image (hold information) for which the hold notice performance is being executed is a jackpot result. However, instead of or in addition to this, the presentation mode may be allowed to be switched if a predetermined miss result (for example, a miss result of an SPSP reach performance or more) is pre-read. In other words, although the presentation mode cannot be switched in principle while the hold notice performance is being executed, if the presentation mode is switched, it can be suggested that there is a high expectation for the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice performance.

The configuration that allows exceptional switching of presentation modes as described above is not essential, and in the eighth embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that, without referring to the results of the hold preview process, the decision as to whether or not to allow switching of presentation modes is determined based on whether or not a hold preview presentation is being performed and the type of specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the eighth embodiment, the presentation mode can be switched on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the mode can be switched without going through such a lottery. In other words, if the condition for switching the presentation mode is met during the execution of the reserved notice presentation and the result of the pre-reading of the reserved information is a jackpot result, the presentation mode can be switched without fail.

(90) In the ninth embodiment, the presentation mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but the presentation mode may be switched automatically without the player's operation. Such a configuration may be, for example, a case in which the switching of the presentation mode is preset based on the predetermined result being pre-read by the reserved information pre-reading process, and then the automatic switching of the presentation mode is performed when the switching execution condition is met. Note that the switching execution condition may be, for example, the start of a play round of the reserved information in which the predetermined result has been pre-read, or the start of a play round a predetermined number of times before the current play round.

(91) In the above ninth embodiment, the configuration has two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the multiple types of presentation states, but a configuration with three or more types of presentation modes may be used. In this case, for example, in a configuration with presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the hold notice presentation may be less likely to be executed in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, and the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be different in each of the presentation modes, or the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be the same for all presentation modes A to C, or a configuration may be used in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, such as presentation modes A and C having the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation, but presentation mode B having a difficulty of executing the hold notice presentation.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice performance are mixed with presentation modes with different ease of execution, the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted while in a standby state for switching presentation modes, as in the case of switching between different presentation modes, even when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, or the execution of the hold notice performance may be permitted even while in a standby state for switching presentation modes, when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution.

(92) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice performance is uniformly restricted when the display mode is in standby for switching, but the execution of the hold notice performance that displays a specific display mode of a predetermined level or higher may be restricted. For example, when the display mode is in standby for switching, the execution of the hold notice performance in which the display mode of the hold image is the blue display mode HMb may be permitted, while the execution of the hold notice performance in which the display mode of the hold image is the green display mode HMc or higher may not be permitted.

(93) In the above ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted when the presentation mode switching standby state is in effect, regardless of the presentation mode to be switched to, but the restriction mode may be different depending on the presentation mode to be switched to. For example, when switching from presentation mode B, in which the hold notice performance is difficult to execute, to presentation mode A, in which the hold notice performance is easy to execute, the execution of the hold notice performance is uniformly restricted when the presentation mode switching standby state is in effect, whereas when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the execution of the hold notice performance may be permitted even when the presentation mode switching standby state is in effect, or the execution of the hold notice performance in a specific display mode higher than a predetermined display mode (e.g., blue display mode HMb) may be restricted, but the execution of the hold notice performance in a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the above ninth embodiment, the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the presentation mode is switched is set when the standby state ends, but it may be set at a predetermined timing during the period from when the standby state ends (after the presentation mode is switched) until the start or end of a play round of the target reserved image HW. When setting during a play round of the target reserved image HW, the display mode may be set based on the result of the reserved image pre-read process of the target reserved image HW, or the display mode may be set based on a change start command sent at the start of a play round of the target reserved image HW.

(95) In the above ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice performance is not restricted for hold information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451, but the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted. In other words, the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted not only during the standby state, but also before transitioning to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed while the hold notice performance is being performed, the display mode of the hold image that is the target of the hold notice performance may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa at a predetermined timing during the period from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed to when the performance mode is switched. Note that specific timings for changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa may include the timing of displaying the switching guide image 451, the timing of transitioning to a standby state, and the timing of switching performance modes.

(96) In the above ninth embodiment, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, the execution of the hold notice performance is not restricted for hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state. However, the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted.

In this case, the configuration may be such that the execution restriction of the hold notice performance is started prior to the transition to the standby state based on the display of the switching guide image 451 (transition to the switching guide state). In other words, after the display of the switching guide image 451, the hold notice performance triggered by the hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state may not be executed before the transition to the standby state or during the standby state.

Also, the hold notice performance may be temporarily executed before transitioning to the standby state, but the execution of the hold notice performance may be canceled when transitioning to the standby state. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, a hold notice performance triggered by the hold information acquired before transitioning to the standby state is executed before transitioning to the standby state, and then the display mode of the hold image that is the target of the hold notice performance may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that specific examples of the timing of the change from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa include the timing of transitioning to the standby state and the timing of switching performance modes.

(97) In the ninth embodiment, the hold read-ahead process is executed when hold information is acquired during a standby state, and after the standby state ends, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold read-ahead process executed during the standby state. However, the hold read-ahead process for the hold information acquired during the standby state may be executed after the standby state, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after the standby state may be set based on the result. In this case, the hold read-ahead process may be executed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. In addition, the hold read-ahead process may be not executed when hold information is acquired during a standby state, or may be executed.

(98) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration according to the eighth embodiment may be applied, and the transition to the switching guidance state may be restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed. Specifically, while the hold notice performance is being executed, the switching guidance lottery may not be executed even if it is time to execute the lottery, the switching guidance image 451 may not be displayed or the notification flag may not be set even if the lottery is won, or a determination may not be made as to whether or not it is time to execute the switching guidance lottery.

(99) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

The inventions described in the following characteristics have been made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention seeks to solve in the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined bonus is given to the player (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The background technology is "Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of game presentation in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game round control means (a function for executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, with the game round operation being counted as one game round.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specification means for executing a destination specification process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment (a function for executing a reserved read-ahead process by the main control device 162 in the first to fourth embodiments and the sixth to seventh embodiments, and a function for executing a reserved command setting process by the main control device 162 and a first reserved read-ahead process by the performance control device 143 in the fifth embodiment);
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice and a first execution process for a hold notice by the performance control device 143 in the first to seventh embodiments) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specific process;
Equipped with
The specific aspect includes a plurality of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) that are set so as to have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
When a specified event occurs while the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (when the presentation mode is switched in the first to third embodiments, when the opening/closing execution mode is performed in the fourth and fifth embodiments, or when a power outage occurs in the sixth to seventh embodiments), at least the hold notification set to the specific mode is set to a specific mode or a specific state in which the hold notification is not executed (a configuration in which the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the presentation mode in the first to third embodiments, a configuration in which the hold image is made invisible by executing the opening/closing execution mode in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and a configuration in which the hold image is made to disappear due to the occurrence of a power outage in the sixth to seventh embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specification means (a function for executing a setting process for the return of a notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, a second execution process for the hold notice, and a third execution process for the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing a return process for the hold notice and a fourth execution process for the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the seventh embodiment) that can change the notification mode of the hold notice that is the subject of the specific state after the end of the specific state to a predetermined first mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode before the specified event occurred, or a predetermined second mode (higher specific display mode, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of a higher level than the notification mode before the specified event occurred.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called reserved pre-read, so that the player's expectation of the grant response result can be aroused even before the start of the game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as the specific mode so that the expectation level of the grant response result is different, the expectation level can be suggested by assigning a large or small value, which is an advantageous configuration for arousing the player's expectation. In such a configuration, if a predetermined event occurs in a situation in which the reserved notification is set to a specific mode, the system transitions to a specific state in which the specific mode or the reserved notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may misunderstand or feel uneasy that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared due to the non-execution of the specific mode, etc. In this regard, in this configuration, after the end of the specific state, the reserved notification is executed as a first mode equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event, or a second mode higher than that, so that the expectation level can be suggested again, making it possible to maintain the expectation of the grant response result.

Feature A2: The device is configured to be able to store information corresponding to at least the specific notification mode of the hold notification in a predetermined storage unit (the return area 344f of the RAM 344),
The gaming machine described in feature A1 is characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of a hold notification that is the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode based on information stored in the specified memory unit when the notification mode is to be the specified first mode (a function for executing setting processing for preview return in the performance control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function for executing setting processing for the display mode in the sixth embodiment).

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the specific state ends, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode of the hold notification to the same mode as before the specific state (before the occurrence of the specified event) after the specific state ends.

Feature A3: The game is provided with an execution notification section (execution display area D) that performs a predetermined notification (display of a pending image in the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of a reserved game round;
The gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with identification means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the sixth to seventh embodiments) that can set the manner of a specified notification made by the execution notification unit to the specified first manner or the specified second manner during a game round of special information corresponding to the hold notice that is the subject of the specified state.

In the above configuration, when a process is carried out to change the notification mode before the occurrence of a specified event to a first mode of the same rank or a second mode of a higher rank after the end of a specific state, the implementation period can include up to the play round of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state. This makes it possible to secure a long processing period for restoring the notification mode to a mode of the same rank, etc., and for example, even if a specified event occurs immediately before the start of a play round of the pending notification that has been set to the specific mode, the restoration process can be carried out by utilizing the execution period of the play round after the end of the specific state. This makes it possible to appropriately suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Feature A4. When a game round is executed, a game round performance setting means (function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) is provided that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game round based on the special information (reserved information) that is the subject of the grant judgment that is the trigger of the game round or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature A3 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of the specified notification to the specified second mode based on the special information or the identification information referenced by the game round presentation setting means when the notification mode of the specified notification is to be the specified second mode (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function for executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments).

For example, if the notification mode is simply returned to the same level after the end of the specific state, it will not be possible to suggest a higher level of expectation than was suggested before the occurrence of the specified event. However, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a higher level, it will no longer be consistent with the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round, and may result in the player losing trust. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round presentation in the game round of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state, the notification mode of the specified notification corresponding to that pending notification is promoted to a higher level than before the occurrence of the specified event. This makes it possible to promote the notification mode of the specified notification while preventing the notification mode of the specified notification from becoming inconsistent with the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, characterized in that the identification means includes a determination means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function for executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the identification information referenced by the game play presentation setting means, and when the determination means determines that the notification mode is to be the predetermined second mode, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the predetermined second mode.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to use a higher-level mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round presentation, and if the determination allows promotion to a higher-level mode, a promotion process is performed. This makes it possible to promote the notification mode of the specified notification after the end of the specific state, within a range that does not exceed the expected degree of the game round presentation that is actually performed.

Feature A6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A5, characterized in that the specifying means includes means for changing the notification mode of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state from the predetermined first mode to the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends.

When the notification mode of the pending notification is set to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of a specific state, if the higher mode is suddenly set, it may be difficult for the player to understand the correspondence with the specific mode that was in place before the occurrence of the specified event, which may lead to confusion. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode is first set to the same level and then changed to a higher level notification mode, making it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and making it possible to reduce the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature A7. The specific mode means includes a first scenario setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification scenario (performance scenario) for setting the notification mode of the hold notice to the specific mode when the notification mode of the hold notice is set to the specific mode;
A gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a second scenario setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a notice return in the presentation control device 143) for setting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode or the specified second mode after the end of the specific state.

For example, in a configuration in which play is possible in a specific state, play times are consumed during the specific state, so it is expected that the execution period (remaining period) after the specific state of a pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the occurrence of a specified event will vary depending on the length of time spent in the specific state. In this regard, in addition to the notification scenario set before the occurrence of a specified event, after the end of the specific state, a notification scenario is reset to make the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state have the same mode, etc., so that the notification mode of the pending notification can be suitably changed to the same mode, etc., even when the remaining period of the pending notification after the specific state varies.

Feature A8. A reserved number grasping means (a function for executing the process of step S2103) for grasping the reserved number of game times before or before the special information corresponding to the reserved notice that became the target of the specific state after the end of the specific state;
The gaming machine described in feature A7, characterized in that the second scenario setting means sets a notification scenario for achieving the specified first mode or the specified second mode based on the number of reserved balls grasped by the number of reserved balls grasping means.

In the above configuration, when a specific state ends, the number of pending notifications is grasped, and the notification scenario is reset to take the result into account to set the notification to the same level, etc. Therefore, regardless of the duration of the stay in the specific state, the notification mode of the pending notification can be suitably changed to the same level, etc.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, characterized in that the specific state is such that the notification mode for at least the reserved notification set to the specific mode is the normal mode.

When the notification mode of the pending notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode as a result of the transition to the specific state, it is easy for the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features A1 to A8 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

When the hold notification is in the normal mode in a specific state, a process is required to change (upgrade) the normal mode to a mode of the same rank after the specific state ends. By applying this feature to feature A7 or feature A8, it is possible to appropriately change from the normal mode to a mode of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the execution of the specific mode in the specific state for the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (a function for restricting the execution of the hold notice presentation triggered by the hold information acquired in presentation mode B).

For example, if the notification mode of a hold notification that was set to a specific mode is set to a normal mode in a specific state, while special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode, there is a concern that processing will become complicated because it is necessary to distinguish between special information acquired before the specific state and special information acquired during the specific state. In addition, if there is a hold notification that has been changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, but the hold notification for special information acquired later is set to the specific mode, there is a risk that this will further incite anxiety that the expectation for the change to the normal mode of the previous hold notification has disappeared. In this regard, the present configuration restricts the change to the specific mode in the specific state for hold notifications corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state, making it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A10, characterized in that it is provided with a means for causing the specific mode means to perform processing for the hold notification in which the execution of the specific mode is restricted after the specific state ends (a function for executing the second setting process for the hold notice in the second embodiment).

As described in the effect of feature A10 above, by restricting the change of special information acquired during a specific state to a specific form, it is possible to suppress the creation of anxiety that the expectation level for the change to the normal form in the previous pending notification has disappeared. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the opportunity to suggest the expectation level for special information acquired during a specific state will be lost. In this regard, in the above configuration, the pending notification to which such a restriction is imposed is allowed to be changed to a specific form after the end of the specific state, so that the opportunity to suggest the expectation level can be secured.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is such that at least a reserved notification that is a specific mode is not executed.

If the notification mode of the pending notification is not executed when the transition to the specific state occurs, it is easy for the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features A1 to A8 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature A13: After the specific state ends, the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state is executed in the normal manner,
The gaming machine described in feature A12 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which is set to the normal mode, to the specified first mode or the specified second mode (a function for executing setting processing for the return of the preview in the performance control device 143).

If the notification mode of the hold notification is deactivated following a transition to a specific state, and then the hold notification is resumed in the normal mode, this may further incite anxiety that the expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features A1 to A8 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exhibited.

In the case of a configuration in which the hold notification is not executed in a specific state and the hold notification returns to the normal state after the specific state ends, a process is required to change (upgrade) the normal state to a state of the same rank after the specific state ends. However, by applying this feature to feature A7 or feature A8, it is possible to preferably change from the normal state to a state of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes.

This feature can also be expressed as "the specifying means includes a means (a function of executing a setting process for the return of a preview in the performance control device 143) for changing the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to the specified first state or the specified second state after the hold notification is executed in the normal state after the specific state ends."

Feature A14: A specific effect means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher notification mode;
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the pending notification that is the subject of the specific state is set to the predetermined first mode, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion performance);
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the specific performance suggests that the notification mode of the pending notification will change to a higher notification mode, so that the player's expectation of the change to a higher mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the pending notification can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when a specific performance is performed in a state of the same rank after the end of a specific state, it is assumed that the player will associate the higher notification mode with the notification mode he or she remembers (the mode before the occurrence of the specified event) as a standard, even though the mode is actually the same rank. In this case, the actual notification mode will not match the mode associated with the player, which may damage the player's trust in the specific performance. In this regard, in the present configuration, when the mode of the same rank is set after the end of a specific state, the execution of the specific performance is restricted, so that the player is prevented from associating the higher mode with the actual notification mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations individually to each of the configurations of features A1 to A14 above, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that causes a specific notification (hold notice performance) to be performed by a specific notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on a specific execution trigger (a result of a look-ahead),
Equipped with
The specific notification means includes a first notification mode setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on a setting result of the first notification mode setting means;
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (a function of executing a performance mode switching process in the performance control device 143) transitions from one of a plurality of types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) including a predetermined performance state to another performance state;
a second notification mode setting means (a function for executing a setting process for the return of the notification by the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state when the specific notification (the hold notification performance by the hold image HW) is being executed and the specific notification is then transitioned from the predetermined performance state to another performance state and then transitioned to the previous predetermined performance state;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, multiple types of presentation states are provided, and the presentation states are switched when a specific transition condition is met. This allows the player to change his/her mood while playing, and prevents boredom from the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the execution of a specific notification is canceled when the presentation state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that the player may misunderstand or feel anxious that the chance that was notified or suggested by the specific notification has been lost. In such a case, it is possible to limit the switching of the presentation state while the specific notification is being executed, but this could lead to a situation where the frequency of switching of the presentation state decreases, undermining the purpose of providing multiple types of presentation states.

In this regard, with this feature, if a transition is made from a predetermined presentation state to another presentation state while a specific notification is being executed, and then the transition is made to the predetermined presentation state again, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set based on the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state, so that the specific notification can be restored to its original notification mode by returning the presentation state to its original state. This notifies the player that the chance has not been lost, and the specific notification can be executed without imposing restrictions on switching presentation states. In other words, it becomes possible to optimally achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of presentation states.

Feature B2. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game. (A function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162)
The gaming machine described in feature B1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, which makes it easier for the presentation state to change while the specific notification is being performed. By applying the configuration of feature B1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above-mentioned effects can be optimally achieved.

In addition, this characteristic may have a characteristic that "the presentation state transition means includes a means for switching the presentation state in accordance with the execution of a game round." In a configuration in which a specific notification is performed across game rounds and the presentation state is switched in accordance with the end of a game round, an event in which the presentation state is switched during the execution of a specific notification is particularly likely to occur, making it possible to more effectively exert the above-mentioned effect of characteristic B1.

Feature B3: The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (the return area 344f of the RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of a specific notification in a subsequent specified presentation state based on information stored in the specified memory unit.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when a transition is made to a later specified performance state, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. This allows the specific notification in the later specified performance state to be suitably restored to the original notification mode that was executed in the previous specified performance state.

Feature B4. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting as one game time;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification before the special information that is the subject of the destination specification process becomes the subject of the grant determination based on a result of the destination specification process,
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the specific notification means transitions from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of a specific notification triggered by specific special information (pending information of a target hold image HW), and then transitions to a later predetermined presentation state before the play round of the specific special information ends or before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant determination by the grant determination means, and is equipped with a specific means (a function of executing setting processing for the return of the notice in the presentation control device 143, processing for the second execution of the hold notice, and processing for the third execution of the hold notice) that executes a specific notification in response to the specific special information in the later predetermined presentation state.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on the result of so-called reserved pre-reading, so that the notification mode of the specific notification suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the award judgment will be the award response result, and can ideally arouse the player's expectation that the award response result will be before the award judgment is made. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled with the switching of the presentation state as described above, there is a concern that the player may mistakenly believe that the award response result has disappeared or the expectation has decreased.

In this regard, according to this configuration, if the original presentation state is restored before the play round of the special information that triggered the specific notification ends or before the special information becomes the subject of a grant judgment, the notification mode of the specific notification is set to correspond to the original notification mode. This makes it possible to inform the player that the grant response result has not disappeared, and also to suggest the degree of expectation for the special information before the grant judgment result for the special information that triggered the specific notification is notified. This makes it possible to appropriately address the above concerns and to appropriately balance the execution of the specific notification with the switching of the presentation state.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state, regardless of the result of the previous specific processing in the previous predetermined presentation state.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification in a later specified presentation state is set based on the results of a reserved look-ahead performed in a previous specified presentation state, it is expected that a mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous specified presentation state will be set. Also, in a configuration in which the notification mode of a specific notification is changed (ranked up) in stages, even with the same look-ahead result, differences in the notification mode of the specific notification at the time of switching the presentation state may occur depending on the timing of the switch, so if the notification mode in the later specified presentation state is set based on the results of a reserved look-ahead, a mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous specified presentation state is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later specified presentation state is set based on the notification mode of the specific notification when switching from that presentation state to another presentation state, rather than the result of the reserved pre-read performed in the previous specified presentation state, so that when the presentation state returns to the original state, it can be set to the same notification mode as the specific notification that was actually notified. This allows the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state to be appropriately matched with the notification mode in the later specified presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification mode has returned.

Feature B6: The specific notification means is
A first scenario setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice) for setting a notification scenario (performance scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification when a specific notification is made triggered by the specific special information in the previous predetermined performance state;
A second scenario setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a notice return) for resetting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification in the case where a specific notification is made in response to the specific special information in a later predetermined performance state;
A gaming machine according to feature B4 or feature B5, characterized in that it is provided with:

When a specific notification is made in a later specified presentation state, it is expected that the period from when the specific notification is switched to the later specified presentation state until the game round of the special information to which the specific notification corresponds starts or ends will vary depending on the length of time spent in the other presentation state. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific notification is made in a later specified presentation state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset, so that the notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode even when the above-mentioned period varies.

Feature B7. When the state transitions to a later predetermined performance state, a reserved number grasping means (a function for executing the process of step S2103) is provided for grasping the reserved number of game times before or before the specific special information;
The gaming machine described in feature B6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of reserved balls grasped by the number of reserved balls grasping means.

In the above configuration, when switching to a later specified presentation state, the number of pending notifications is grasped and the notification scenario for the specific notification is reset taking the result into consideration, so that the notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode regardless of the duration of stay in the other presentation state.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for limiting the continuation of a specific notification (a function for changing the display mode of the pending image HW to the normal display mode HMa) when a transition is made from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the specific notification that had been executed up until that point is restricted (regulated) when the presentation state is switched, which can easily give the player the mistaken impression that their chance has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations from feature B1 to feature B7 to this type of configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Feature B9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B8, characterized in that the predetermined presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific notification being executed differs from the other presentation states.

In the case of a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in a situation in which the expectation level, etc., suggested by the specific notification differs before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, such inconsistencies in expectation level, etc. can be suppressed by canceling the execution of the specific notification when the presentation state is switched. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that this may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features B1 to B8 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

In addition, in this feature, "the specified presentation state is a presentation state that differs from the other presentation states in the ease with which the specific notification is executed" can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the other presentation states are set as states in which the specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the other presentation states are set as states in which the specific notification is not executed.

Feature B10: The plurality of notification modes in the specific notification are set so as to have different expectations for the grant response result;
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B9, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means is equipped with a first means (setting process for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode of a specific notification in a later specified presentation state to a specified first mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode of a specific notification in a previous specified presentation state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set to a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize that the specific notification has returned.

Feature B11. The gaming machine described in Feature B10, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means includes a second means (setting process for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification in a later predetermined presentation state to the predetermined first mode, and then setting the notification mode to a predetermined second mode (such as a higher specific display mode) that the player can recognize as being higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of a specific notification in a later specified presentation state can be a higher-ranking notification mode than the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, which prevents the notification mode in the later specified presentation state from being limited to the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, narrowing the range of possible expectations, etc. In this case, if a higher-ranking notification mode is suddenly used, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, making the presentation difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode is first set to the same rank and then changed to a higher-ranking notification mode, making it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and reducing player confusion.

Feature B12: A specific presentation means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) for executing a specific presentation (change suggestion presentation) suggesting that the notification mode of the specific notification will change to a higher level notification mode;
When the notification mode of the specific notification is the first mode in the later predetermined performance state, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion performance);
The gaming machine according to feature B10 or B11, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the specific presentation suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification will change to a higher notification mode, so that the player's expectation of the change to a higher mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the notification mode of the specific notification is set to a mode of the same rank, it is assumed that the player will associate the higher notification mode with the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state that he remembers, even though the mode is actually the same rank. In this case, the actual notification mode will not match the mode associated with the player, and there is a risk that the player's trust in the specific presentation will be damaged. In this regard, in the present configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher notification mode, if the notification mode is simply returned to the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, the execution of the specific presentation is restricted, so that it is possible to suppress the player's association with a mode higher than the actual notification mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B13. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting as one game time;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) for issuing a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and it is easy for the presentation state to change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates as to the degree of expectation, etc., it is expected that there will be a large impact if the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to a change in the presentation state. By applying any of the configurations from feature B1 to feature B12 above to this configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Feature B14. The gaming machine described in Feature B13 is characterized in that, when a transition is made from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state in a situation where the presentation state of the hold notification corresponding to specific special information (hold information of the hold image HW) is a specific presentation state, the gaming machine is provided with a means for setting the presentation state of the hold notification corresponding to the specific special information to the normal presentation state (a function for setting the display state of the hold image HW to the normal display state HMa).

In the above configuration, when the presentation state is switched, the hold notification that was previously in a specific mode is changed to a normal mode, which can easily give the player the impression that he has been downgraded and can easily give the player the mistaken impression that his expectations have decreased. By applying any of the configurations from feature B1 to feature B12 to this configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features B1 to B14 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice in the second embodiment) capable of executing a specific mode process for changing the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process;
Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the presentation mode is switched from the presentation mode A to the presentation mode B), the specific mode or the execution of the hold notification is restricted, and the state is transitioned to a restricted state.
A gaming machine characterized by having a setting means (a function of executing a second setting process for hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the second embodiment) that sets the notification mode after the restricted state for the hold notification corresponding to special information obtained during the restricted state based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of so-called reserved pre-reading, so that it is possible to arouse the player's anticipation that the corresponding result will be obtained even before the start of a game round. With such a configuration, a restricted state may be set for a reserved notification that is already set to a specific mode, which restricts the execution of the specific mode or the reserved notification. However, if new special information is obtained in the restricted state, and such special information is not changed to the specific mode, there is a concern that it will not be possible to arouse the player's anticipation for the special information obtained during the restricted state.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the restricted state ends, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation for the special information acquired during the restricted state. In this case, the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the results of the destination specification process (reserved pre-reading process) executed during the restricted state, so the destination specification process can be performed in the same way as when the restricted state is not in effect. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the destination specification process, it is possible to change the notification mode of the reserved notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the destination determination means is configured to perform the destination determination process for the acquired special information in accordance with the timing of acquisition of the special information, regardless of whether the restricted state is in effect or not.

According to the above configuration, the destination identification process can be performed according to the timing of acquiring the special information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state, so there is no need to distinguish between the destination identification process in the former and latter cases. Therefore, it is possible to change the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, characterized in that the setting means executes the setting when or after the restricted state ends.

For example, if the notification mode after the restricted state is set based on the results of a destination-specific process executed during the restricted state, and the setting is configured to be performed during the restricted state, if a play round of special information corresponding to the pending notification for which the notification mode was set is executed during the restricted state, the pending notification may end without the setting of the notification mode being reflected, and the setting may be wasted. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode is set at or after the end of the restricted state, preventing such waste from occurring and enabling efficient processing.

Feature C4. The restriction state restricts the execution of the specific mode,
A gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode during the restricted state for the pending notification corresponding to special information obtained during the restricted state to the normal mode, or a predetermined mode (black display mode) different from both the normal mode and the specific mode (a function for forcibly setting the display mode of the pending images HB1, HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode).

In the above configuration, in a restricted state in which the execution of a specific mode is restricted, the hold notification is performed in a normal mode or in a predetermined mode different from both the normal mode and the specific mode, so that the specific mode can be prevented from being executed while the player can recognize the number of reserved plays. By applying any of the configurations of features C1 to C3 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C4, characterized in that if special information is acquired during the restricted state, a predetermined piece of information (information indicating that the occurrence is pending during the restricted period) can be stored in a predetermined memory unit (a reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344) so that it can be recognized after the restricted state that the special information was acquired during the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, even if special information acquired before the restricted state and special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the restricted state ends, the special information acquired during the restricted state can be identified based on the specified information stored in the specified storage unit. This makes it possible for the setting means related to feature C1 to distinguish between special information acquired during the restricted state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the restricted state.

Feature C6. A plurality of presentation states including a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) are set as presentation states,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (a function of executing a performance mode switching process in the performance control device 143) is provided to transition from one of a plurality of types of performance states to another performance state,
A gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C5, characterized in that when the first presentation state is transitioned to the second presentation state, the gaming machine is configured to transition to the restricted state.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is entered when the presentation state is switched. In this case, since it is considered that the player will play in the presentation state after the switch, it is expected that special information will be acquired during the restricted state. By applying any of the configurations of features C1 to C5 to such a configuration, it is possible to make each of those features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C6, characterized in that the second presentation state is a presentation state in which the ease with which the specific mode processing is executed differs from the first presentation state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease of changing to a specific mode differs depending on the presentation state, if the presentation state is switched while maintaining the specific mode, there is a risk that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode will become inconsistent before and after the switch. In this case, such inconsistency in expectation level can be suppressed by restricting the execution of the specific mode and the hold notification when transitioning from the first presentation state to the second presentation state. However, even if the above restriction is applied to the hold notification that was the specific mode before transitioning to the second presentation state, concerns arise as to how to handle the new hold notification that is made when special information is acquired in the second presentation state. By applying any of the above features C1 to C6 to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be preferably exerted.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific mode processing being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" means that a specific notification can be executed in both the first presentation state and the second presentation state, and can be understood to include not only cases in which the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification differs in each of these presentation states, but also configurations in which the specific notification is not executed in either the first presentation state or the second presentation state.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in Feature C6 or Feature C7, characterized in that the restricted state is configured to end when the second presentation state ends.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is released when the second presentation state ends, so that for the pending notification of special information acquired during the second presentation state, execution of the specific mode or pending notification is restricted during the second presentation state, and then the specific mode can be set in response to the end of the second presentation state.

Feature C9. An execution notification section (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game round;
A gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903) for setting the notification mode of the specified notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, which is performed by the execution notification unit, to a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the prior specific processing performed during the restricted state, when a play round of special information acquired during the restricted state is performed during the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, for a pending notification whose notification mode change is restricted by transitioning to a restricted state, a change to a specific mode is permitted as play progresses up to the play round of the pending notification. Therefore, even if the play round of special information acquired during the restricted state is executed during the restricted state, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for that special information.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features C1 to C9 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of executing a specific mode process that sets the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on a predetermined execution trigger (pre-reading result);
Equipped with
The specific aspect includes a plurality of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) that are set so as to have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
A plurality of types of states are set, including a first state (presentation mode A) and a second state (presentation mode B) in which the specific aspect processing is performed with a different degree of ease from the first state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific mode processing is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to one of a plurality of types of modes and then transitions to the second state, the gaming machine is equipped with a mode determination means (a function of executing processing for switching presentation modes by the presentation control device 143 in the third embodiment) which determines whether the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode in the first state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the pending notification is a specific mode, and multiple types of modes are set for the specific mode so that the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result is different. Therefore, by setting the pending notification to one of the specific modes, the degree of expectation can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation for the grant corresponding result can be suitably aroused. Also, in this configuration, multiple types of states are set, including a first state and a second state which differs from the first state in the ease with which it can be changed to the specific mode. Switching between these states allows the player to change his/her mood during play, and makes it possible to prevent boredom from the game.

In such a configuration, when transitioning from the first state to the second state occurs while a specific mode of pending notification is being made, maintaining the specific mode may result in the corresponding expectation level being far removed from that before the transition to the second state, depending on the type of the specific mode, which may lead to misunderstanding by the player. In this regard, in the present configuration, when such a transition occurs, a determination is made as to whether or not the notification mode of the pending notification after the transition to the second state will be a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode in the first state. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies in expectation levels from occurring, and makes it possible to perform pending notifications appropriately after the transition to the second state.

In addition, the "second state in which the ease with which the specific mode processing is performed differs from the first state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode, but also a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification cannot be changed to a specific mode.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, the second state is less likely to cause the hold notification to be in a specific mode than the first state, so when comparing the expectation level for the grant response result when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to a specific mode, it is expected that the second state will be higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the expectation level for the grant response result for the specific mode is low to a state in which the expectation level is high, and by applying the configuration of feature D1 to such a transition, it is possible to suppress inconsistencies in the expectation level and to appropriately perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state" can be understood to include a configuration in which the probability that the hold notification will be set to a specific mode in the second state is set to be lower than that in the first state, as well as a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification will not be changed to a specific mode.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2, characterized in that the mode determination means determines that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state is a mode higher than a predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode) and determines that the notification mode of the hold notification is allowed to be the predetermined mode when the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state is a mode lower than the predetermined notification mode.

In the above configuration, the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state is compared with a predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state to determine whether or not the notification mode in the first state should be of the same rank. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the notification mode should be of the same rank in the second state based on the expected degree of expectation corresponding to each mode, and makes it possible to perform hold notifications appropriately after transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "a predetermined notification mode set in response to the second state."

Feature D4. A destination specification means (a function for executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) is provided for executing a destination specification process for specifying information (such as a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on a result of the first specific process,
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the mode determination means makes the determination based on the result of the destination identification processing for the special information corresponding to the hold notification that is the subject of determination by the mode determination means.

In the above configuration, the change to a specific mode is made based on the result of the advance specification process (the so-called look-ahead result). When the mode determination means determines whether or not to make the mode the same rank, the above determination is made based on the look-ahead result of the pending notification that is the subject of the determination. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to make the mode the same rank, taking into account the look-ahead result of the pending notification, that is, the notification result of the game round that is executed when the special information of the pending notification becomes the subject of the determination by the grant determination means, and the game round presentation of that game round.

Feature D5: A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set in accordance with the results of the destination specification process (return determination table);
The mode determination means is
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S3105) for grasping the result of the destination specification process for the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the mode determination means;
A means for making the determination based on an upper limit state corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types of states (a function for executing the process of step S3106);
A gaming machine as described in feature D4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, multiple types of upper limit modes are set corresponding to the look-ahead results, and when the mode determination means determines whether or not to use the same mode, the upper limit mode corresponding to the look-ahead result of the hold notification that is the subject of the determination is applied and the above determination is made. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to use the same mode without causing the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state to exceed the expectation level corresponding to the first state.

Feature D6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the specific mode means, when executing the specific mode process, executes the hold notification in a first specific mode (blue display mode HMb), which is one of the multiple types of modes, and then has a means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) that is higher than the first specific mode (function for executing setting process for hold notice in the performance control device 143).

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode, the notification mode is changed to a higher mode in stages. In such a configuration, when the process of setting the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode is performed in the first state, for example, if a transition to the second state occurs in the early stages after the specific mode, the specific mode at that time is assumed to be a relatively lower mode (a mode with low expectations), and conversely, if the transition occurs at the end, it is assumed to be a relatively higher mode (a mode with high expectations). In other words, depending on the timing of the transition to the second state, there is a difference in which mode the specific mode of the hold notification is. In this way, by applying any of the configurations of features D1 to D5 to the configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to set the same mode depending on the notification mode each time, and it becomes possible to perform the hold notification preferably after the transition to the second state.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "the mode determination means includes means for determining whether or not the notification mode in the first mode immediately before transitioning to the second state is a predetermined mode that allows the player to recognize that he or she is of the same rank."

Feature D7. The second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than the first state;
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D6, characterized in that when the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to one of multiple types of modes and then transitions to the first state, the gaming machine is provided with a means for not executing the judgment by the mode determination means (a function for skipping the processing of steps S3105 to S3107 when a negative judgment is made in step S3104).

In the above configuration, when the hold notification transitions from the second state, in which it is relatively unlikely to be a specific mode, to the first state, in which it is relatively likely to be a specific mode, that is, when the expectation of the grant response result for the specific mode switches from a high state to a low state, the configuration does not determine whether or not the hold notification will be in the same mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the opportunities for maintaining the notification mode of the hold notification, and also to reduce the processing load.

Feature D8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D7, characterized in that it is provided with a change means (function for executing the process of step S3110) for changing the notification mode of the pending notification that is the subject of the determination from the normal mode to the predetermined mode when the mode determination means determines that the predetermined mode should be used.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the same-rank mode, it is first set to the normal mode and then changed to the same-rank mode. In this case, in both cases of setting the notification mode to the same rank or not setting the same-rank mode, the notification mode of the hold notification can be configured to switch to the normal mode when switching from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing from the specific mode to the normal mode due to a determination that the notification will not be set to the same-rank mode. In addition, by configuring the notification to change to the normal mode and then to the specific mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the hold notification set to the normal mode will be changed to the specific mode after transitioning to the second state, including when it is determined that the notification will not be set to the same rank mode, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the hold notification.

Feature D9: A specific performance means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) for executing a specific performance (change suggestion performance) that suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher notification mode;
When the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the change means, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of a change suggestion performance);
A gaming machine as described in feature D8, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the special effect suggests that the notification mode of the pending notification will change to a higher notification mode, which creates anticipation for the change to a higher notification mode and increases the player's attention to the pending notification. In such a configuration, for example, if a special effect is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, it is assumed that the notification mode in the first state remembered by the player will be used as a standard and the player will associate it with a higher notification mode. In this case, there is a concern that even though a special effect has been performed, it will give the unnatural impression that the original state has simply been restored. In this regard, in the present configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher rank, the execution of the special effect is restricted when changing from a normal state to a mode of the same rank, so it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature D10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D9, characterized in that it is provided with a means (function for executing the process of step S3108) for changing the notification mode of the pending notification that was the subject of the determination to the normal mode or to a notification mode lower than the predetermined mode when the mode determination means determines that the predetermined mode should not be used.

In the above configuration, if it is determined that the mode should not be the same, the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or a lower level notification mode, so that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state can be prevented from exceeding the expected level corresponding to the first state, and it becomes possible to perform the hold notification appropriately after transitioning to the second state.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features D1 to D10 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A special game state means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process,
In addition to the special game state, multiple types of game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
A specifying means (a function for executing a setting process for a notice return by the performance control device 143 in the fourth embodiment) for setting the notification mode after the special game state to be different from the notification mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, for the notification mode for the hold notification set to a specific mode before the special game state;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called reserved pre-read, so that the degree of expectation for the award corresponding result can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused. Also, in this configuration, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when the judgment result of the award judgment means becomes the award corresponding result and a special game state is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple types of game states. In such a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the special information used for the award judgment is the same, differences may occur in the result of the award judgment and the game round presentation performed in the game round depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for the hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state was executed, if the game state before and after the special game state is different, the notification mode after the special game state is set to be different from the notification mode before the special game state. Therefore, even if the award determination result or game number presentation due to the difference in the game state changes, the hold notification is prevented from misleading the player, and it is possible to appropriately execute the hold notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the specifying means includes a means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode for the pending notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different (a function for executing the processing of step S3417 after a negative judgment is made in step S3504).

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and a pending notification is issued. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a pending notification that does not match the actual expectation level from being issued after the special game state, which may lead to misunderstandings by the player. Furthermore, by uniformly setting the mode to the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the notification mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E3. The identification means is
A first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the hold notice set to the normal mode by the first means is to be set to a specific mode and setting the notification mode of the hold notice based on the result of the determination;
The gaming machine described in feature E2 is characterized by being equipped with:

By changing the notification mode of the reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award judgment results and game number presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the reserved notification. In this regard, with this configuration, the reserved notification that was set to the normal mode is given the opportunity to change to a specific mode afterwards, so it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

Feature E4: An execution notification section (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game round;
The identification means is
A first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the reservation notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the reservation notice is to be a specific mode different from the normal mode in a game of the reservation notice set by the first means, and setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the result of the determination;
A gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

By changing the notification mode of a reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award judgment results and game round presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the reserved notification. In this regard, with this configuration, for a reserved notification that was set to a normal mode, an opportunity to change to a specific mode is given as play progresses to the game round of that reserved notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

Feature E5. When a game round is executed, a game round performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) is provided that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game round based on the special information (reserved information) that is the subject of the grant judgment that is the trigger of the game round or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature E4 is characterized in that the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the specified notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means.

In the above configuration, the game play presentation setting means determines whether or not to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game play presentation. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode while adapting it to the game play presentation actually performed in the game play after the special game state when the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature E2, "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means" can be expressed as "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means, regardless of the information stored in the specified memory unit."

Feature E6: The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification set to the specific mode before the execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (a return area 344f of the RAM 344).
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the results of a reserved read-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode may be set to a different mode from the notification mode before the special game state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special game state is executed in a situation where a reserved notification of a specific mode exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In addition, in this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit" can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit regardless of the result of the advance specification process."

Feature E7: The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, so that the pending notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special game state can arouse the player's expectations in the same way even after the special game state.

Feature E8. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The identification means is
When a game state before the special game state and a game state after the special game state are different, a first means for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode (a function for executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative judgment in step S3504);
a second means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows a player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the second means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S3507) that can set the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode and then to the specified mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, the notification mode is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the reserved notification is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode as the special game state is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal mode due to a difference in the game state. In addition, by configuring the notification mode to change to the specific mode after the normal mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the reserved notification, which was set to the normal mode, will be changed to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the reserved notification.

Feature E9. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the identification means includes a game state determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3416) that determines whether or not the game state before the special game state is the same as the game state after the special game state during the special game state or when the special game state ends.

In the above configuration, the determination of whether the game states are the same or not is performed while the special game state is in progress or when the special game state ends. This makes it possible to quickly respond after the special game state as to what mode the notification mode of the reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, should be after the special game state. Therefore, even if the number of reserved balls before the reserved notification is small after the special game state, the notification mode of the reserved notification can be suitably adjusted.

Feature E10. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 65) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A switching control means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) that switches the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then switches the variable ball entry means to the second state;
Equipped with
The special game state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once,
A gaming machine described in feature E9, characterized in that the game state determination means makes the determination during the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state during a special game state, it is expected that the processing load will be relatively high, such as the need to perform effects based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. If a match determination is made during such a period, there is a concern that this will result in an even higher load. In this regard, with this configuration, the match determination is made during the period when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature E11. The award determination means performs the award determination based on the first information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) included in the special information;
A game round performance setting means (a function of executing a special chart variation display process in the performance control device 143) is provided for setting a game round performance (reach performance) to be performed in the game round based on second information (value of the variation type counter CS) included in the special information or specific information (variation pattern) derived from the second information,
The destination specification process specifies the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specification information corresponding to the second information at a timing before the first information included in the predetermined special information becomes a target of the grant determination,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E9, characterized in that the multiple types of gaming states include a first gaming state (either a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state) and a second gaming state (either a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state, and a gaming state different from the first gaming state) in which a gaming round presentation or specific information corresponding to a predetermined second information (a variable type counter CS with a value of 80) is different from the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the game round presentation is set based on the second information included in the special information, and the first game state and the second game state are configured so that the corresponding game round presentation is different even if the value of the second information is the same. For this reason, if the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, and the notification mode after the special game state in the hold notification is made the same as the notification mode before the special game state, there is a risk that the game round presentation suggested by the hold notification before and after the special game state will not be consistent. By applying any of the configurations of features E1 to E9 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be preferably exerted.

Feature E12. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that it is provided with a means for not issuing the hold notification in the special game state (a function for executing the process of step S3411).

When changing the notification mode of a reserved notification when a special game state ends, there is a concern that if the notification mode of the reserved notification that was being performed up until that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player may have an unnatural impression. For example, if the notification mode of the reserved notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is expected that this will be easily noticeable to the player and will likely give an unnatural impression. In this regard, since the reserved notification is not performed in the special game state in this configuration, when changing the notification mode, a period can be inserted during which the reserved notification itself, including other reserved notifications, is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the notification mode from being noticeable and to alleviate unnaturalness. Another advantage is that not performing a specific notification makes it easier for the player to focus on the special game state presentation.

Feature E13: An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A special game state means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process,
In addition to the special game state, multiple types of game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
A specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return by the performance control device 143 in the fourth embodiment) for changing the notification mode after the special game state, which is set as a specific mode before the special game state, depending on whether the game state before the special game state is the same as the game state after the special game state or not;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called reserved pre-read, so that the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused. In addition, in this configuration, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when the judgment result of the grant judgment means is the grant corresponding result and the special game state is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple types of game states. In this configuration in which multiple types of game states are set, even if the special information used for the grant judgment is the same, differences may occur in the result of the grant judgment and the game round performance performed in the game round depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for the reserved notification that was set to a specific mode before the execution of the special game state, the notification mode in the game state after the special game state is different depending on whether the game state before and after the execution of the special game state is the same, so that the notification mode can be set based on the change in the grant judgment result, the game round performance, etc. caused by the difference in the game state, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the reserved notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature E14: The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification set to the specific mode before the execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (a return area 344f of the RAM 344).
The gaming machine described in feature E13 is characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the results of a reserved read-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode may be set to a different mode from the notification mode before the special game state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special game state is executed in a situation where a reserved notification of a specific mode exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In addition, in this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit" can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit regardless of the result of the advance specification process."

Feature E15: The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The gaming machine described in feature E13 or feature E14, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, so that the pending notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special game state can arouse the player's expectations in the same way even after the special game state.

Feature E16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E13 to E15, characterized in that the determination means includes means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode for the pending notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different (a function for executing the processing of step S3417 after a negative determination is made in step S3504).

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and a pending notification is issued. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a pending notification that does not match the actual expectation level from being issued after the special game state, which may lead to misunderstandings by the player. Furthermore, by uniformly setting the mode to the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the notification mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E17: An execution notification unit (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending notification so that the player can recognize the execution of a pending game round;
The identification means is
A first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the reservation notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the reservation notice is to be a specific mode different from the normal mode in a game of the reservation notice set by the first means, and setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the result of the determination;
The gaming machine described in feature E16 is characterized by comprising:

By changing the notification mode of a reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award judgment results and game round presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the reserved notification. In this regard, with this configuration, for a reserved notification that was set to a normal mode, an opportunity to change to a specific mode is given as play progresses to the game round of that reserved notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

Feature E18. When a game round is executed, a game round performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) is provided that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game round based on the special information (reserved information) that is the subject of the grant judgment that is the trigger of the game round or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature E17, characterized in that the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the specified notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means.

In the above configuration, the game play presentation setting means determines whether or not to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game play presentation. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode while adapting it to the game play presentation actually performed in the game play after the special game state when the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature E2, "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means" can be expressed as "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means, regardless of the information stored in the specified memory unit."

Feature E19. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The identification means is
a first means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows a player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same;
A second means (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after a negative judgment is made in step S3504) for setting the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode for the hold notification that was set to the specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features E13 to E18, characterized in that the first means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S3507) that can set the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode and then to the specified mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, the notification mode is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the reserved notification is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode as the special game state is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal mode due to a difference in the game state. In addition, by configuring the notification mode to change to the specific mode after the normal mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the reserved notification, which was set to the normal mode, will be changed to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the reserved notification.

It is possible to apply the configurations of features E9 to E12 to features E13 to E19. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features E1 to E19 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information (reserved information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A specific notification means (a function of executing a first execution process of the hold notice in the performance control device 143) that executes a specific notification (display of a hold image) corresponding to the specific special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
Equipped with
A first destination specifying means (a function of executing a first reserved information read-ahead process by the performance control device 143 in the fifth embodiment) for specifying information (such as a variation pattern) corresponding to a judgment result when the specified special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment for the specified special information at a predetermined timing (the timing of acquiring reserved information) before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
a second destination specifying means (a function of executing a second reserved look-ahead process by the performance control device 143 in the fifth embodiment) for specifying information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment for the predetermined special information at a specific timing (termination timing of the opening/closing execution mode, etc.) after the predetermined event, when a predetermined event (opening/closing execution mode, etc.) occurs during execution of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
A first means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the specific special information before the specific event based on the identification result of the first destination identification means;
A second means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the specific special information after the specific event based on the result of the determination by the second destination determination means;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation that the result will be a grant-corresponding result, and can appropriately arouse the player's sense of expectation. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of a specified event, and even if the value of the special information used in the grant judgment is the same, there may be differences in the result of the grant judgment before and after the specified event. In this regard, in the present configuration, if a specified event occurs during the execution of a specific notification, the look-ahead processing is executed again after the specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, and the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the result. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the specified event can be adjusted to a mode appropriate for after the specified event, and it becomes possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature F2. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game, and a game control means (a function of executing a game control process in the main control device 162) is provided.
The gaming machine described in feature F1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, which can easily lead to a situation in which a specific event occurs while the specific notification is being performed. By applying the configuration of feature F1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effects can be preferably achieved.

Feature F3. A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the award information (random number value corresponding to a jackpot) or the determination condition (probability of winning) in the award determination means can be different before and after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, differences may occur in the results of the awarding judgment before and after the specified event. For this reason, if a specific notification is made after a specified event in the notification mode before the specified event, there is a concern that it may suggest a result that is different from the notification result (the result of the awarding judgment) that is actually notified in the game round. By applying the configuration of feature F1 or F2 above to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to be consistent with the actual notification result in the game round and to make a notification after a specified event, making it possible to preferably make a specific notification after a specified event.

Feature F4. The gaming machine described in Feature F3, wherein the second destination determination means performs the determination by applying the given information or the judgment condition corresponding to the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after a specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the pre-reading process is performed by applying the attached information and judgment conditions corresponding to the state after the specified event. This makes it possible to adjust the notification mode for the specific notification performed before the specified event so that it is consistent with the actual notification result in the game round, and to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature F5. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) for starting a game time operation based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and ending the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting it as one game time, so that the game time operation is performed;
A game round performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) for setting a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in a game round based on special information (reserved information) or specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the game presentation corresponding to the specified special information or the specified specific information derived from the specified special information (a fluctuation pattern with a value of 80) is configured to be different before the specified event and after the specified event.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information or specific information is the same, differences may occur in the game round presentation set by the game round setting means before and after the specified event. For this reason, if a specific notification after a specified event is made in the notification mode before the specified event, there is a concern that it may lead to a situation in which a different presentation is suggested from the game round presentation actually performed in that game round. By applying the configuration described in any of the above features F1 to F4 to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the specified event so that it is consistent with the actual game round presentation, and to perform a notification after the specified event, making it possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature F6. The first destination specifying means and the second destination specifying means are provided with a means for specifying a game round performance corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information as information corresponding to the judgment result;
The gaming machine described in feature F5, wherein the second destination identification means identifies a game round presentation corresponding to the specified special information or specific information corresponding to the specified special information in response to the specified event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after a specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game round presentation and specific information are pre-read in accordance with the state after the specified event. This makes it possible to adjust the notification mode for the specific notification that was performed before the specified event so that it is consistent with the actual game round presentation, and to perform the notification after the specified event, making it possible to perform the specific notification preferably after the specified event.

Feature F7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F6, characterized in that the second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the result of the determination by the second destination determination means.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification is configured to change frequently as a specific event occurs, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode after the specific event is set taking into account not only the identification result of the second destination identification means, but also the notification mode before the specific event. Therefore, for example, if the notification mode before the specific event is compared with the identification result of the second destination identification means and there is no problem in keeping the same mode after the specific event, the specific notification can be carried out by continuing the notification mode before the specific event. This makes it possible to prevent the notification mode from changing excessively after the specific event, and makes it possible to carry out the specific notification after the specific event in a natural manner.

Feature F8. The specific notification is set to a plurality of types of display modes (a normal display mode HMa, a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation level of the result of the grant determination that the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information is different;
The gaming machine described in feature F7 is characterized in that the second means is equipped with a mode determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4703 to S4705) which determines whether the notification mode after the specified event is a specified mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the specified event, based on the notification mode before the specified event and the determination result of the second destination determination means.

In the above configuration, multiple types of notification modes for the specific notification are set with different expectations for the corresponding result. In this configuration in which the expectations are set in stages and multiple notification modes are provided, the range of expectations that one notification mode corresponds to is narrow, so if a specific notification after a specified event is performed using a notification mode before a specified event, a difference in the expectations suggested before and after the specified event is likely to occur. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the notification mode before the specified event and the identification result of the second identification means, it is determined whether the notification mode after the specified event is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the specified event, so that even in a situation in which multiple notification modes are set, it is possible to match the expectations and perform the specific notification after the specified event appropriately.

Feature F9. The gaming machine described in Feature F8, characterized in that the second means includes a means for setting the notification mode after the predetermined event to a normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or a notification mode lower than the notification mode before the predetermined event when the mode determination means determines not to set the predetermined mode (a function for executing the process of step S3417 after a negative determination in step S4706).

In the above configuration, if it is determined that the notification mode should not be of the same rank, the notification mode of the specific notification that was the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or a lower level notification mode, so that it is possible to prevent the notification mode after a specified event from exceeding the corresponding expectation level before the specified event, and it is possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature F10. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting as one game time;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) for performing a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F9, characterized in that the specific notification is the hold notification.

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it easier for a specified event to occur while the specific notification is being made. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification is suggesting is the subject of expectation, it is expected that there will be a large impact if there is a difference in expectation before and after the specified event. By applying any of the configurations of features F1 to F9 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature F11. A special game state (a function for executing a large prize opening/closing process in the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
In addition to the special game state, multiple types of game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the specified event is the special gaming state.

Some gaming machines transition to a normal gaming state, high probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc., upon transition to a special gaming state. In such gaming machines, even if the value of the special information used in the award determination is the same in the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state, differences may occur in the results of the award determination before and after the special gaming state. By applying any of the configurations of features F1 to F10 above to such a configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Feature F12. A gaming machine according to feature F11, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S3411) for not executing the specific notification in the special gaming state when the special gaming state is entered during the execution of the specific notification.

When changing the notification mode of a specific notification when a special game state ends, there is a concern that the player may get an unnatural impression if the specific notification that had been performed up until that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state. For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is expected that this will be easily noticeable to the player and will likely give an unnatural impression. In this regard, since the specific notification is not performed in the special game state in this configuration, a period in which the specific notification itself is not performed can be inserted when changing the notification mode. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the notification mode from being too noticeable and to alleviate the unnaturalness. Another advantage is that not performing the specific notification makes it easier for the player to focus on the special game state presentation.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of features F1 to F12 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A first specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that causes a specific notification (hold notice performance) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) based on the result of the destination specific processing;
Equipped with
The first specific notification means includes a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on a setting result of the first notification mode setting means;
If a predetermined abnormality (power interruption state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, a second specific notification means (a function of executing a process for restoring the hold notice by the performance control device 143 in the sixth embodiment, and a function of executing a performance setting process by the performance control device 143 in the seventh embodiment) is provided for re-executing the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific notification means is equipped with a second notification mode setting means (a function of executing a display mode setting process by the presentation control device 143 in the sixth to seventh embodiments) which sets the notification mode of the specific notification that is re-executed after a specified abnormality is resolved based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the specified abnormality occurred, the result of the destination specific processing executed before the specified abnormality occurred, or the result of the destination specific processing executed after the specified abnormality is resolved.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead process, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for the corresponding result to be obtained, and the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused. At that time, since multiple types of modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, the degree of expectation can be suggested by setting one of the multiple types of modes and executing the specific notification. Under such a configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs while the specific notification is being performed and the abnormality is then resolved, the specific notification that was performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. This allows the specific notification to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and prevents the specific notification from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification is set based on the notification mode before the abnormality occurred, the look-ahead result performed before the abnormality occurred, or the look-ahead result performed again after the abnormality occurred, so that the specific notification that was performed before the abnormality occurred can be suitably restored.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 is configured so that if the specified abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, the specific notification is not executed.

In a configuration in which the occurrence of an abnormality causes a special notification to not be executed, it is easy for a player to feel uneasy that not only has the special notification disappeared, but the expectation associated with that special notification has also disappeared. By applying the configuration of feature G1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effect can be optimally achieved.

Feature G3. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 or Feature G2, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means performs the setting at a predetermined timing during the period from when the predetermined abnormality is resolved to when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant determination by the grant determination means.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification that is re-executed is set during the period from when the abnormality is resolved to when the play round of the special information that triggered the specific notification starts. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification can be restored to the mode before the abnormality occurred before the play round of the special information starts, making it possible to suggest the degree of expectation before that play round.

Feature G4: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information regarding the image for reservation) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345),
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G3, characterized in that it is configured to retain information stored in the specified memory unit when the specified abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, making it possible to perform the specific notification appropriately after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature G5: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The specific notification is set in the plurality of notification modes so that the degree of expectation for the specific notification to become the grant response result is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G4, characterized in that it is equipped with a determination means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to a notification mode lower than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) before the occurrence of a specified abnormality, or for not executing the specific notification (a function for not executing the hold notice presentation after the abnormality is resolved).

For example, if a change occurs in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, an inconsistency occurs between the results of the look-ahead performed before the abnormality occurred and the results of the award judgment performed after the abnormality is resolved. In such a case, if a high expectation level is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs and it is re-executed as is after the abnormality is resolved, the result of the announcement (the result of the award judgment) in the game round and the game round performance performed in the game round may not be consistent with the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, and there is a concern that this may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the announcement mode of the specific notification performed at the time of the abnormality was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is re-executed by limiting it to a lower announcement mode, or the specific notification itself is not executed. This prevents the specific notification from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the announcement result in the game round, etc., and makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G6: When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is configured to be retained;
The gaming machine described in feature G5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means (a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification set by the determination means to a notification mode lower than the specified mode or the specific notification that has been not executed based on the judgment result of the grant judgment means when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment by the grant judgment means after the specified abnormality has been resolved.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed by being limited to a lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation or the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment, so that the notification mode of the specific notification is reset or the non-executed specific notification is executed. This prevents the suggested expectation from remaining low or the specific notification from disappearing completely. In that case, the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant judgment, so that the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode that is consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature G7: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on a result of the prior specific processing executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result of the destination specification process is configured to be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G6, characterized in that it is configured to retain information stored in the specified memory unit when the specified abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the look-ahead result is stored in a specified storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, making it possible to perform the specific notification appropriately after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature G8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification based on a result of the prior specific processing executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The specific notification is set in the plurality of notification modes so that the degree of expectation for the specific notification to become the grant response result is different,
If the specific result of the destination specification means becomes a specific result (a winning result) before the occurrence of the specific abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is allowed to be a notification mode (red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) higher than the specific mode (green display mode HMc),
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G7, characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means that either limits and sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification to a notification mode equal to or lower than the specified mode (a function of executing the processing of step S6303), or does not execute the specific notification (a function of not executing the hold notice presentation after the abnormality is resolved) if the result of the previous specific processing executed before the occurrence of a specified abnormality is a specified result.

For example, if a change occurs in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, an inconsistency occurs between the results of the look-ahead performed before the abnormality occurred and the results of the award judgment performed after the abnormality is resolved. In such a case, if a high expectation level is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs and it is executed again as is after the abnormality is resolved, the result of the notification (the result of the award judgment) in the game round and the game round performance performed in the game round may not be consistent with the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, which may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is executed in a limited manner or less, or if the look-ahead result before the abnormality occurs is a specified result, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed, so that the specific notification is prevented from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the result of the notification in the game round, etc., and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature G9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is configured to be retained;
The gaming machine described in feature G8 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means (a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification set by the determination means to a notification mode lower than the specified mode or the specific notification that has been not executed based on the judgment result of the grant judgment means when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment by the grant judgment means after the specified abnormality has been resolved.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed by being limited to a lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation or the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment, so that the notification mode of the specific notification is reset or the non-executed specific notification is executed. This prevents the suggested expectation from remaining low or the specific notification from disappearing completely. In that case, the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant judgment, so that the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode that is consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature G10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G9, characterized in that it is provided with a means for restricting the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved if a specific abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification and the result of the specific processing performed before the abnormality occurs cannot be identified after the specific abnormality is resolved (a function for transitioning to step S6311 if a negative judgment is made in step S6308).

In the above configuration, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, and the look-ahead result on which the notification was based cannot be identified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is restricted, thereby preventing erroneous expectations from being suggested.

Feature G11: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on a result of the prior specific processing performed after a predetermined abnormality is resolved;
A game operation control means (a function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162) is provided which controls the game operation so that the game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, with the end of the game operation being counted as one game operation;
A hold notification means (a function for executing a hold command corresponding process in the performance control device 143) is provided for performing a hold notification (hold image) corresponding to the number of game times for which execution is held,
The first specific notification means is configured to set a notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) as the specific notification,
The device is configured to store specific information (change location information) that allows the user to grasp the hold notification that is being made in a situation where a plurality of hold notifications are being made in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup RAM 345),
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G10, characterized in that it is configured to retain information stored in the specified memory unit when the specified abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is issuing a specific notification is stored in a specified memory unit, and this information is backed up when an abnormality occurs, so that after the abnormality is resolved, it is possible to conveniently determine which hold notification was issuing a specific notification before the abnormality occurred.

Feature G12. The gaming machine described in Feature G11, characterized in that after a specified abnormality is resolved, the hold notification for which the specific notification was made before the occurrence of the specified abnormality is identified based on the specific information stored in the specified storage unit, and the specific process is executed for the identified hold notification.

In the above configuration, the next specific processing after the abnormality is resolved is performed on the reserved notifications for which a specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, so that it is possible to prevent a player from having an unnatural impression when a specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved even for reserved notifications for which a specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred. Furthermore, compared to performing the next specific processing on all reserved notifications performed after the abnormality is resolved, it is possible to reduce the number of times the next specific processing is performed, making it possible to reduce the processing load when returning.

Feature G13. A gaming machine according to Feature G11 or Feature G12, characterized in that it has a means for identifying the pending notification for which the specific notification was not made before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality based on the specific information stored in the predetermined storage unit after the predetermined abnormality has been resolved, and for setting the notification mode of the identified pending notification to the normal mode.

The above configuration prevents specific notifications from being made after the abnormality is resolved for pending notifications that were not made before the abnormality occurred, making it possible to ensure consistency in the notification mode before and after the abnormality occurs.

Feature G14. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G13, characterized in that the specified abnormality is a power outage.

If a power outage occurs while a specific notification is being executed, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, causing the specific notification that had been being executed to suddenly disappear. In this case, it is expected that the player will be anxious about whether the expectation suggested before the power outage will remain after the power is restored. By applying any of the above features G1 to G113 to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately re-execute the specific notification after power is restored, and each of these features can be made to function effectively.

The "power outage state" of this characteristic can also be expressed as "a power outage state in which no power is being supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)."

Feature G15. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game. (A function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162)
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution,
The specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification that is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode),
A gaming machine described in any of features G1 to G14, characterized in that the specific mode is set to multiple types of notification modes.

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it easier for abnormalities to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification is suggesting, such as the degree of expectation, it is expected that there will be a large impact if the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any of the configurations from feature G1 to feature G14 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features G1 to G15 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of executing a specific notification (hold notice performance) by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on the result of the first specific processing;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the first mode switching lottery is won in the eighth embodiment), a presentation state switching means (a function of executing a presentation mode switching process by the presentation control device 143 in the eighth embodiment) executes a process for switching from one of a plurality of presentation states (presentation mode A, presentation mode B) to another presentation state;
A switching restriction means (a function for executing a mode switching determination process by the performance control device 143 in the eighth embodiment) capable of restricting the switching of the performance state by the performance state switching means when a specific notification is being executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for the corresponding result to be obtained, and can ideally arouse the player's sense of expectation. In addition, since multiple types of presentation states are provided and switching between these presentation states is performed, the player can change his/her mood while playing and prevent boredom from the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that the player will be distracted by the change in presentation state and will pay less attention to the specific notification, or conversely, as a result of concentrating on the specific notification, the presentation state will be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, the switching of the presentation state is restricted when a specific notification is being executed, thereby preventing overlapping between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state. This allows the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for the player to notice, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation state after the switch is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature H2. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state;
The gaming machine described in feature H1 is characterized in that the switching restriction means includes a means for restricting switching to the second presentation state when a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state.

In a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed varies depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in a situation in which the expectation level suggested by the specific notification differs before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the specific notification in the presentation state after the switch will differ from the result of the award judgment that is actually notified, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the configuration of feature H1 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from having an unpleasant impression.

In addition, the "second presentation state in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the second state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H2, characterized in that the second presentation state is a presentation state set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state.

When the likelihood of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, there is a concern that switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, and present the player with a higher expectation level than in reality. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from the first presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is relatively high (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low) to the second presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is low (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the switch is restricted if the specific notification is being executed, so that it is possible to suitably prevent a higher expectation level being suggested than in reality.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state that is set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state" can be understood to include a configuration in which the probability of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is set to be lower than that in the first presentation state, as well as a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature H4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H3, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes a means (a function for executing the processing of step S7207) for restricting switching of the presentation state based on the result of the prior specific processing that triggered the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the switching of the presentation state is restricted based on the result of the pre-reading process that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification will be made, such as when a jackpot is pre-read, the switching of the presentation state can be restricted based on the pre-reading until the end of the play round of the special information for which the pre-reading was made. In this case, the switching can be restricted quickly, and the overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state can be preferably prevented. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, the following effect can be expected. When the pre-reading result is a jackpot, etc., it is assumed that a provocative performance such as a preview performance that stimulates the player's expectations will be performed before the special information is subject to the granting judgment. If the switching of the presentation state is inserted during the execution of the provocative performance, the provocative performance may become difficult to understand from the player's perspective. In this case, by restricting the switching of the presentation state based on the pre-reading of a jackpot, etc., the switching of the presentation state can be prevented in the middle of the provocative performance, and it is possible to preferably prevent the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

For example, a configuration can be adopted in which switching of the presentation state is not generally permitted while a specific notification is being executed, but switching of the presentation state is permitted in special cases, such as when a jackpot is predicted in advance. In this case, even though a switching of the presentation state does not normally occur, the occurrence of such a switch can violate the rules from the player's perspective and suggest a jackpot or the like. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize switching of the presentation state as one of the presentations suggesting the degree of expectation.

Note that the "means for restricting switching" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for determining whether or not switching is restricted."

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H4, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes means (a function for executing the process of step S7207) for restricting switching of the presentation state based on whether the result of the specific processing that triggered the specific notification was a predetermined first result (a big win prediction result) corresponding to the award corresponding result or a predetermined second result (a SPSP reach presentation prediction result) corresponding to a predetermined expectation level as the expectation level of the award corresponding result.

By restricting or allowing the switching of presentation states when the pre-read result is a jackpot result (first result) or a result with high expectations (second result), it becomes possible to optimally exert each of the above-mentioned effects of feature H4.

Feature H6. The specific notification is set with a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation of the specific notification is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features H1 to H5, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes a means (step S7211) for restricting the switching of the presentation state based on the notification mode of a specific notification.

For example, if a configuration were adopted that uniformly restricted the switching of presentation states while a specific notification was being executed, there is a risk that the switching of presentation states would be excessively restricted or the frequency with which specific notifications were executed would be kept low, which would undermine the significance of providing multiple types of presentation states and the significance of having a function for executing specific notifications. In this regard, the above configuration restricts the switching of presentation states based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed, making it possible to operate in such a way that, for example, in the case of a specific notification that corresponds to a certain level of expectation or below, the switching of presentation states is not restricted and such switching is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the switching of presentation states and the execution of specific notifications, and makes it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the restricting means restricts the switching of the presentation state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a notification mode higher than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and allows the switching of the presentation state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode equal to or lower than the predetermined mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the switching of the presentation state only when a specific notification of a predetermined type or more is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching of the presentation state and the execution of a specific notification, and makes it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

Feature H8. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) in which the frequency of execution of a specific notification is set lower than that of the first presentation state;
The specific notification is set with a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation degree of the specific notification is different from that of the grant corresponding result,
The switching restriction means is
When a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state, a first means (a function of executing a process when a positive determination is made in step S7206) restricts switching to the second presentation state regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification;
A second means (a function of determining negative in step S7206 and executing processing in step S7211) for restricting switching to the first performance state based on a notification mode of the specific notification when the specific notification is being executed in the second performance state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, when switching from a presentation state (first presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low to a presentation state (second presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high, the switching of the presentation state is uniformly restricted, so that it is possible to preferably prevent a higher expectation level than the actual level being suggested. Conversely, when switching from a presentation state (second presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high to a presentation state (first presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low, the switching of the presentation state is restricted only to some notification modes, so that excessive restriction on the switching of the presentation state is prevented, and it is possible to preferably secure the opportunity for the switching.

Feature H9. The presentation state switching means is
A switching determination means (a function for executing the process of step S7102) for determining whether or not to switch the presentation state based on a predetermined trigger (a switching lottery timing);
A switching execution means (a function for executing the process of step S7106) for switching the presentation state when the switching determination means determines that the presentation state should be switched;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the switching restriction means restricts at least one of the determination by the switching determination means and the execution by the switching execution means.

In the above configuration, when restricting switching of the presentation state, at least one of the switching decision of whether to switch the presentation state or not and the execution process of whether to execute the switch or not is restricted, so that it is possible to appropriately restrict switching of the presentation state.

Feature H10. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game. (A function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162)
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, which makes it easier for the presentation state to change while the specific notification is being performed. By applying any of the features H1 to H9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature H11. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game. (A function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162)
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution of the game,
A gaming machine described in any of features H1 to H10, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which the presentation state changes during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates as to the degree of expectation, etc., it is expected that there will be a large impact if the degree of expectation indicated by the change in presentation state changes. By applying any of the configurations from features H1 to H10 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features H1 to H11 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of executing a specific notification (hold notice performance) by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on the result of the first specific processing;
A presentation state switching means for switching the presentation state from one of a plurality of presentation states (presentation mode A, presentation mode B) to another presentation state (a function for executing a presentation mode switching process by the presentation control device 143 in the ninth embodiment);
Equipped with
The presentation state switching means includes:
When a predetermined first condition is satisfied (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step S8109 in the ninth embodiment), a first means (a function of executing the process of step S8111 in the ninth embodiment) for setting a specific state (standby state) in which it is understood that the presentation state will be changed thereafter;
A second means (a function for executing the process of step S8117 in the ninth embodiment) for switching the presentation state when a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the situation of the specific state (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step S8115 in the ninth embodiment),
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by having a restriction means (a function of executing the processing of step S8203 in the ninth embodiment) that can restrict the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is present.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for the corresponding result to be obtained, and can ideally arouse the player's sense of expectation. In addition, since multiple types of presentation states are provided and switching between these presentation states is performed, the player can change his/her mood while playing and prevent boredom from the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that the player will be distracted by the change in presentation state and will pay less attention to the specific notification, or conversely, as a result of concentrating on the specific notification, the presentation state will change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted under a specific state where it is known that the presentation state will subsequently change, and therefore it is possible to prevent the presentation state from changing while the specific notification is being executed. This allows the execution of the specific notification and the change in presentation state to be carried out in a way that is easy for the player to notice, and it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation state after the change is not suitable for the specific notification currently being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, according to the present configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, characterized in that the limiting means includes a means (a function for executing pending command response processing in the performance control device 143) capable of limiting the execution of a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state.

In the above configuration, the execution of a specific notification can be restricted for special information acquired during a period in which the specific state in which the switching of the presentation state is awaited. This broadens the scope of special information that is subject to the restriction of the specific notification, and prevents excessive restrictions on the opportunities to execute the specific notification.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or I2, wherein the limiting means is capable of limiting the execution of a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state, regardless of the result of the advance specific processing for the special information.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of a specific notification regardless of the result of the look-ahead processing. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the presentation state from switching while a specific notification is being executed. In addition, since the restriction on the execution of a specific notification is not affected by the result of the look-ahead processing, the look-ahead processing can be carried out in the same way as in a non-specific state even in a specific state (a waiting period for a specific notification). In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the look-ahead processing (look-ahead specific processing), it is possible to restrict a specific notification in a specific state while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I4. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state;
A gaming machine described in any of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is present at least for switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state.

In the case of a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in a situation in which the expectation level suggested by the specific notification differs before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the specific notification in the presentation state after the switch will differ from the result of the award judgment that is actually notified, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying any of the configurations of features I1 to I3 above to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from having an unpleasant impression.

In addition, the "second presentation state in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature I5. The gaming machine described in Feature I4, characterized in that the second presentation state is a presentation state set to make it less likely that a specific notification will be executed than in the first presentation state.

When the likelihood of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, there is a concern that switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, causing the player to be presented with a higher expectation level than in reality. In this regard, in the present configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted in a specific state for switching from the first presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is relatively high (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low), to the second presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is low (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high). This prevents switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent a higher expectation level being suggested than in reality.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state that is set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state" can be understood to include a configuration in which the probability of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is set to be lower than that in the first presentation state, as well as a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature I6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I5, characterized in that it is equipped with a specifying means (a function for executing a second setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143, and a first execution process for a hold notice) that executes a specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state after the specific state or after the performance state is switched, if the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the restricting means.

In the above configuration, the specific notification, the execution of which is restricted due to the specific state, is executed after the specific state is entered or after the presentation state is switched, so that the execution of the specific notification remains restricted for special information acquired during the specific state, and it is possible to prevent the expectation level from being suggested.

Feature I7. The gaming machine described in Feature I6, characterized in that the identification means includes a means for executing a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state for special information for which execution of the specific notification has been restricted by the restriction means, based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the specific state (a function for executing the process of step S8302).

According to the above configuration, the specific notification after the change in the presentation state is made based on the results of the look-ahead performed during the specific state, so the specific notification can be made without having to perform the look-ahead process again after the change in the presentation state. This allows the existing configuration to be used as is for the look-ahead process (predetermined processing), preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I8. The identification means is provided with a specific determination means (a function for executing the process of step S8307) for determining whether or not to execute a specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the presentation state based on the result of the previous specific process performed during the specific state, for the special information for which the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means, and is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined by the specific determination means to execute the specific notification;
The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the specific judgment means makes the judgment by applying a judgment condition (execution winning probability) set in accordance with the presentation state after the switch.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, and if it is determined that the specific notification should be executed, the specific notification is executed. In this case, the above determination is performed using a judgment condition set in correspondence with the presentation state after the change, rather than the judgment condition when the special information was acquired (the judgment condition set in correspondence with the presentation state before the change). This makes it possible to preferably execute a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, even if the ease of executing the specific notification differs between the presentation state before the change and the presentation state after the change.

Feature I9. The notification mode of the specific notification is set to a plurality of types (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation degree of the grant corresponding result is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features I6 to I8, characterized in that the determination means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8310 to S8313) for determining one of the multiple types of modes by applying lottery conditions (such as a scenario lottery table) set in accordance with the presentation state after the switch when a specific notification is executed after a specific state or after a switch in presentation state.

In the above configuration, multiple types of notification modes are set for the specific notification, so that the degree of expectation can be indicated by assigning a large or small value, and the player's sense of expectation can be more appropriately aroused. With such a configuration, when a specific notification is executed after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, the notification mode is selected by applying the selection conditions set in accordance with the presentation state after the change. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, even if the degree of expectation corresponding to each notification mode differs between the presentation state before the change and the presentation state after the change.

Feature I10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I6 to I9, characterized in that when special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (information generated during standby) is stored in a predetermined memory unit (holding memory area 344c of RAM 344) so that it can be recognized after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, even if special information acquired before the specific state is reached and special information acquired during the specific state are mixed after the specific state is reached or after the presentation state is switched, the special information acquired during the specific state can be identified based on the specified information stored in the specified storage unit. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during the specific state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the specific state.

Feature I11. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game. (A function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162)
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, so that the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state are likely to overlap. By applying any of the above features I1 to I10 to such a configuration, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature I12. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game. (A function of executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162)
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution,
A gaming machine described in any of features I1 to I11, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state are likely to overlap. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates the degree of expectation, etc. for, it is expected that there will be a large impact if the degree of expectation indicated by the switching of the presentation state fluctuates. By applying any of the configurations from feature I1 to feature I11 above to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, features H1 to H11, and features I1 to I12 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of features I1 to I12 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group I described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to I individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine, 62... First operating port, 63... Second operating port, 63a... Normal power device, 65... Variable winning device, 75... Pattern display device, 143... Performance control device, 162... Main control device, 200... Reserve display section, 314b... Reserve ball storage area, 344f... Return area, D... Execution display area, Ga... First reserve display area, Gb... Second reserve display area, HW... Target reserve image.

Claims (1)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an assignment determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on a result of the awarding determination by the awarding determination means being a bonus corresponding result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the awarding information;
a destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant judgment at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A first specific notification means for causing a specific notification to be executed by a predetermined notification means based on a result of the first specific processing;
Equipped with
The first specific notification means includes a first notification mode setting means for setting a notification mode of the specific notification to any one of a plurality of notification modes, and is configured to execute the specific notification based on a setting result of the first notification mode setting means,
a second specific notification means for, when a predetermined abnormality occurs during execution of the specific notification, re-executing the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific notification means is equipped with a second notification mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after a specified abnormality is resolved based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the specified abnormality occurred, the result of the prior specific processing executed before the specified abnormality occurred, or the result of the prior specific processing executed after the specified abnormality is resolved.

Images